Panduan Penggunaan 55POS9002

Transkripsi

1 Register your product and get support at POS9002 series Panduan Penggunaan 55POS9002

2 Daftar isi 1 Mengonfigurasi 10 Menu TV 1.1 Membaca Petunjuk Keselamatan Dudukan TV dan Braket Pemasangan di Dinding Tips tentang Penempatan 1.4 Kabel Daya Kabel Antena 4 11 Sumber 3 Menyalakan dan Mematikan 4 Saluran Jaringan 12.2 Bluetooth Dari Sambungan USB 59 Memutar Video Anda 59 Melihat Foto Anda 60 Memutar Musik Anda Panduan TV Apa yang Anda Perlukan Data Panduan TV Menggunakan Panduan TV Perekaman dan Menjeda TV Merekam Menjeda TV Smartphone dan Tablet 18 Pilihan Teratas Tentang Pilihan Teratas 18.2 Sekarang di TV TV on Demand Video on Demand Menu Awal Membuka menu Awal 19.2 Profil Terbatas Netflix Aplikasi Remote TV Philips 17.2 Google Cast AirPlay MHL Perangkat lunak Perbarui Perangkat Lunak Versi Perangkat Lunak Pembaruan Perangkat Lunak Otomatis Memulai Internet Tentang Aplikasi Google Play Galeri Aplikasi Memulai atau Menghentikan Aplikasi 8.5 Mengunci Aplikasi Mengelola Aplikasi Penyimpanan 40 9 Internet Dari Komputer atau NAS Menu Favorit Menu Paling Populer dan Menu Terakhir Diputar 17 7 Menyambungkan TV Android Anda 34 8 Aplikasi Video, Foto dan Musik 6.1 Tentang Sambungan CAM dengan Kartu Pintar - CI Sistem Home Theatre - HTS Smartphone dan Tablet Pemutar Disk Blu-ray Pemutar DVD Bluetooth Headphone Konsol Permainan Hard Drive USB Keyboard USB Flash Drive USB Kamera Foto Camcorder Komputer Jaringan dan Internet 7.2 Akun Google Gambar Suara Pengaturan Ambilight Pengaturan Ekonomis Pengaturan Umum Pengaturan Jam, Wilayah, dan Bahasa 13.7 Pengaturan Android Pengaturan Akses Universal Pengaturan Kunci Menginstal Saluran Daftar Saluran Filter Daftar Saluran Menonton saluran Saluran Favorit Teks/Teleteks 14 6 Menyambungkan Perangkat Pengaturan Pemasangan Satelit Pemasangan Antena/Kabel 5.3 Salinan Daftar Saluran Salinan daftar satelit Jaringan 9 5 Penginstalan Saluran Beralih ke perangkat Opsi untuk Input TV Nama dan Jenis Perangkat 11.4 Memindai Ulang Sambungan Ikhtisar tombol Memasangkan Remote Control Anda ke TV 2.3 Pencarian Suara Sensor IR Baterai Membersihkan Aktif atau siaga 3.2 Tombol di TV Tentang Menu TV 10.2 Membuka Menu TV 4 2 Remote Control Opsi tentang Internet

3 Perangkat Lunak Sumber Terbuka 21.5 Lisensi Sumber Terbuka Spesifikasi Lingkungan Daya Sistem Operasi Penerimaan Resolusi Layar Resolusi Input Layar 22.7 Konektivitas Suara Multimedia bantuan dan Dukungan Mendaftarkan TV Anda Menggunakan Bantuan Penyelesaian Masalah Bantuan online Dukungan dan Perbaikan Keselamatan dan Perawatan Keselamatan Perawatan Layar Ketentuan Penggunaan Ketentuan Penggunaan - TV Ketentuan Penggunaan - Smart TV 26 Hak Cipta MHL Ultra HD HDMI Dolby Audio DTS Premium Sound 26.6 Wi-Fi Alliance Kensington Merek Dagang Lainnya Penyangkalan mengenai layanan dan/atau perangkat lunak yang ditawarkan oleh pihak ketiga 174 Indeks 175 3

4 pemasangan yang mengakibatkan kecelakaan atau cedera. 1 Mengonfigurasi Tips tentang Penempatan Membaca Petunjuk Keselamatan Atur posisi TV sedemikian rupa sehingga cahaya lampu tidak menyorot langsung ke layar. Redupkan pencahayaan di dalam ruangan untuk efek Ambilight yang terbaik. Atur posisi jarak TV hingga sejauh 15 cm dari dinding. Jarak ideal untuk menonton TV 3 kali ukuran layarnya secara diagonal. Saat duduk, mata Anda harus sejajar dengan bagian tengah layar. Baca petunjuk keselamatan terlebih dahulu sebelum menggunakan TV. Untuk membaca petunjuk, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Petunjuk Keselamatan. 1.2 Dudukan TV dan Braket Pemasangan di Dinding Dudukan TV Anda dapat menemukan petunjuk pemasangan dudukan TV di Panduan Ringkas yang disertakan dengan TV. Jika panduan ini hilang, Anda dapat mengunduhnya dari Kabel Daya Masukkan kabel daya ke konektor POWER di bagian belakang TV. Pastikan kabel daya dicolokkan dengan rapat ke konektor. Pastikan steker daya, di soket dinding, selalu dapat diakses. Jika Anda mencabut kabel daya, tarik stekernya, jangan kabelnya. Gunakan nomor jenis produk TV untuk mencari Panduan Ringkas yang akan diunduh. Pemasangan di Dinding TV Anda juga dipersiapkan dengan braket pemasangan di dinding yang sesuai VESA (dijual terpisah). Gunakan kode VESA berikut ini saat membeli braket pemasangan di dinding... 55POS9002 VESA MIS-F 300x300, M6 Persiapan Lepaskan 4 tutup sekrup plastik terlebih dahulu dari bush berulir di bagian belakang TV. Pastikan sekrup logam yang digunakan untuk memasang TV ke braket yang sesuai VESA masuk kirakira sedalam 10 mm di bush berulir TV. Meskipun konsumsi daya TV ini sangat rendah pada saat siaga, cabut kabel daya untuk menghemat energi jika TV tidak digunakan dalam jangka waktu panjang. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Mengaktifkan untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menyalakan atau mematikan TV. Perhatian Pemasangan TV di dinding memerlukan keahlian khusus dan hanya boleh dilakukan oleh personel berkualifikasi. Pemasangan TV di dinding harus memenuhi standar keselamatan agar sesuai dengan berat TV. Selain itu, baca juga tindakan keselamatan sebelum mengatur posisi TV. TP Vision Europe B.V. menyatakan tidak bertanggung jawab atas pemasangan yang tidak tepat atau 4

5 1.5 Kabel Antena Colokkan steker antena dengan kuat ke soket Antena di bagian belakang TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan antena Anda sendiri atau sinyal antena dari sistem distribusi antena. Gunakan konektor antena RF IEC Koaks 75 Ohm. Gunakan sambungan antena ini untuk mendapatkan sinyal input DVB-T dan DVB-C. 5

6 2 Remote Control 2.1 Ikhtisar tombol Bagian Atas 1 Menu TV Untuk membuka Menu TV dengan fungsi TV biasa. 2 - SOURCES Untuk membuka atau menutup menu Sumber. 3 - INFO Untuk membuka atau menutup info program. 1 - Siaga / Aktif Untuk menghidupkan TV atau kembali ke Siaga BACK Untuk kembali ke saluran sebelumnya yang Anda pilih. Untuk kembali ke menu sebelumnya. VOICE mikrofon 3 - LIST Untuk membuka atau menutup daftar saluran. 5 - Tombol berwarna Pemilihan opsi langsung. 4 - AMBILIGHT Untuk memilih salah satu gaya Ambilight. 6 - EXIT Untuk beralih kembali ke menonton TV. 5 - TV GUIDE Untuk membuka atau menutup Panduan TV. 7 - OPTIONS Untuk membuka atau menutup menu opsi. 6 - SETTINGS Untuk membuka menu pengaturan cepat. Untuk memasangkan remote control ke TV. 8 - Tombol OK Untuk mengonfirmasi pilihan atau pengaturan. 9 - Tombol Panah / navigasi Untuk berpindah ke atas, ke bawah, ke kiri atau ke kanan. 7 - TOP PICKS Untuk membuka menu dengan program yang disarankan, Video on Demand (Video Rental) atau TV Online (Catch Up TV). Jika tersedia HOME Untuk membuka menu Awal. 8 - VOICE Untuk mulai mengucapkan pencarian suara Anda. Bagian Bawah Tengah 6

7 pencarian suara dan keyboard remote control, Anda harus memasangkan (menautkan) TV dengan remote control. Saat Anda memulai penginstalan TV awal, TV akan meminta Anda untuk menekan terus tombol PAIR, dengan begitu, pemasangan selesai. Catatan: 1 - Setelah remote control berhasil masuk mode pemasangan, cincin indikator LED biru di sekitar mikrofon di bagian depan remote control mulai berkedip. 2 - Remote control harus selalu dekat dengan TV (dalam jarak 1 m) selama pemasangan untuk memastikan keberhasilan. 3 - Jika TV tidak menampilkan bidang pencarian suara saat Anda menekan VOICE, berarti pemasangan tidak berhasil. 4 - Sebaiknya tunggu sampai perangkat benar-benar aktif dan semua proses latar belakang diselesaikan sebelum masuk mode pemasangan karena pesan toast yang berisi petunjuk lebih lanjut bisa muncul terlambat, sehingga berdampak negatif terhadap prosedur pemasangan. 1- Untuk membuka Aplikasi Netflix secara langsung. 2 - Volume Untuk menyesuaikan tingkat volume. 3 - Tombol Angka Untuk memilih saluran secara langsung. Memasangkan atau memasangkan lagi 4 - SUBTITLE Untuk mengalihkan Terjemahan ke aktif, tidak aktif, atau aktif saat diam. Jika pemasangan dengan remote control hilang, Anda dapat kembali memasangkan TV dengan remote control. 5 - Pemutaran dan Rekam Putar, untuk melakukan pemutaran. Jeda, untuk menjeda pemutaran Hentikan, untuk menghentikan pemutaran Putar mundur, untuk memutar mundur Putar maju cepat, untuk memutar maju cepat Rekam, untuk memulai perekaman Anda dapat dengan mudah menekan terus tombol PAIR (selama sekitar 3 detik) untuk memasangkan. Atau, buka (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Remote control > Pasangkan remote control, lalu ikuti instruksi pada layar. 6 - Saluran Untuk beralih ke saluran berikutnya atau sebelumnya dalam daftar saluran. Untuk membuka halaman berikutnya atau sebelumnya di Teks/Teleteks. Sebuah pesan akan muncul jika pemasangan berhasil. Perangkat Lunak Remote Control (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Remote control > Info Perangkat Lunak Saat Ini 7 - Diam Untuk menonaktifkan atau mengaktifkan suara lagi. 8 - TEXT Untuk membuka atau menutup Teks/Teleteks. Setelah remote control dipasangkan, Anda dapat memeriksa versi perangkat lunak remote control saat ini. 2.2 (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Remote control > Perbarui perangkat lunak remote control Memasangkan Remote Control Anda ke TV Periksa pembaruan perangkat lunak remote control yang tersedia. Remote control ini menggunakan Bluetooth dan IR (inframerah) untuk mengirimkan perintahnya ke TV. Anda dapat menggunakan remote control ini melalui IR (inframerah) untuk sebagian besar operasi. Untuk menggunakan operasi lanjutan, seperti 7

8 4 - Atur ulang posisi pintu baterai dan dorong ke bawah hingga berbunyi klik. 2.3 Pencarian Suara Keluarkan baterai jika Anda tidak menggunakan remote kontrol dalam waktu lama. Anda dapat mencari video, musik, atau apa pun di Internet cukup dengan suara Anda. Anda bisa mengucapkan perintah ke mikrofon pada remote control. Buang baterai lama Anda secara aman sesuai dengan petunjuk akhir penggunaan. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, pilih Kata kunci, dan cari Akhir penggunaan. Anda harus memasangkan remote control ke TV sebelum menggunakan pencarian suara. Untuk menggunakan Suara Tekan dan tahan VOICE pada remote control, lampu biru di remote control menyala dan bidang pencarian terbuka, mikrofon aktif. 2 - Ucapkan yang Anda cari dengan jelas. Anda dapat mengucapkan perintah selama 10 detik sebelum mikrofon mati. Mungkin perlu beberapa waktu agar hasilnya keluar. 3 - Di daftar hasil pencarian, Anda dapat memilih item yang Anda inginkan. Mengatur bahasa yang ingin Anda gunakan dengan Membersihkan Remote kontrol Anda memiliki lapisan tahan goresan. Untuk membersihkan remote control, gunakan kain lembap yang halus. Jangan pernah gunakan bahan seperti alkohol, bahan kimia atau pembersih rumah tangga pada remote control. interaksi suara (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Android > Preferensi > Ucapan Pengaturan 2.4 Sensor IR Namun, TV juga bisa menerima perintah dari remote control yang menggunakan IR (inframerah) untuk mengirimkan perintah. Jika Anda menggunakan remote control tersebut, selalu pastikan Anda mengarahkan remote control ke sensor inframerah di bagian depan TV. Peringatan Jangan meletakkan benda apa pun di depan sensor IR pada TV, karena sinyal IR dapat terhalang. 2.5 Baterai TV akan memberi tahu jika daya baterai remote control lemah. Untuk mengganti baterai, buka wadah baterai pada sisi keyboard remote control. 1 - Gunakan koin kecil atau benda tumpul kecil lain, lalu tekan tombol pelepas berbentuk persegi untuk membuka tutup baterai. 2 - Masukkan baterai searah per logam dan tarik ujung baterai yang lain keluar. 3 - Ganti baterai lama dengan 2 baterai alkaline jenis AA-LR6-1.5V. Pastikan ujung + dan - baterai sejajar dengan tanda + dan - remote control. 8

9 3 3.2 Menyalakan dan Mematikan Tombol di TV 3.1 Untuk membuka menu dasar Jika remote control Anda hilang atau baterainya kosong, Anda masih dapat melakukan beberapa pengoperasian TV dasar. Aktif atau siaga 1 - Dengan TV yang dinyalakan, tekan tombol joystick di bagian TV untuk menampilkan menu dasar. 2 - Tekan kiri atau kanan untuk memilih Volume, Saluran atau Sumber. Pilih Demo, untuk memulai film demo. 3 - Tekan naik atau turun untuk menyesuaikan volume atau mencari saluran berikutnya atau sebelumnya. Tekan naik atau turun untuk melewati daftar sumber, termasuk pemilihan tuner. Tekan tombol joystick untuk memulai film demo. 4 - Menu akan otomatis menghilang. Pastikan TV tersambung ke kabel AC utama. Sambungkan kabel daya yang disertakan ke konektor AC in di bagian belakang TV. Lampu indikator di bagian bawah TV akan menyala. Mengaktifkan Tekan di remote control untuk menyalakan TV. Alternatifnya, tekan HOME. Anda juga dapat menekan tombol joystick kecil di bagian belakang TV untuk menyalakan TV jika Anda tidak dapat menemukan remote control atau baterainya habis. Untuk menyalakan TV dalam mode siaga, pilih dan tekan tombol joystick. Beralih ke siaga Untuk mengalihkan TV ke siaga, tekan di remote control. Anda juga dapat menekan tombol joystick kecil di bagian belakang TV. Dalam mode siaga, TV masih tersambung ke daya listrik tetapi mengonsumsi energi yang sangat sedikit. Untuk mematikan TV sepenuhnya, cabut steker daya. Saat mencabut steker daya, selalu tarik steker daya tersebut, jangan kabelnya. Pastikan Anda selalu memiliki akses sepenuhnya terhadap steker, kabel, dan stopkontak. 9

10 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran yang saat ini aktif. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup daftar saluran. 4 Saluran Untuk memilih salah satu daftar saluran Dengan daftar saluran terbuka di layar, tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih Pilih Daftar Saluran dan 3 - Pada menu daftar, pilih salah satu daftar saluran dan Menginstal Saluran Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Saluran, Instalasi Antena atau Saluran, Penginstalan Kabel. Selain itu, Anda dapat memilih nama daftar di bagian atas daftar saluran dan menekan OK untuk membuka menu daftar. 4.2 Daftar Saluran Tentang Daftar Saluran Mencari Saluran Setelah penginstalan saluran, semua saluran muncul di daftar saluran. Saluran ditampilkan dengan nama dan logo jika informasi ini tersedia. Anda dapat mencari saluran untuk dalam daftar saluran yang panjang. TV dapat mencari saluran dalam salah satu dari 2 daftar saluran utama - daftar saluran Antena atau Kabel. Dengan daftar saluran dipilih, tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk memilih saluran, lalu tekan OK untuk menonton saluran yang dipilih. Anda hanya bisa menonton saluran yang ada di dalam daftar tersebut jika menggunakan tombol atau. Untuk mencari saluran 1 - Tekan. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran yang saat ini aktif. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS. 4 - Pilih Pilih Daftar Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Filter Saluran Antena atau Filter Saluran Kabel dan 6 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan tekan OK untuk membuka bidang teks. Anda dapat menggunakan remote control keyboard (jika tersedia) atau keyboard pada layar untuk mengetikkan teks. 7 - Ketik nomor, nama atau bagian nama dan pilih Terapkan dan TV akan mencari nama-nama saluran yang cocok di dalam daftar yang Anda pilih. Ikon saluran Setelah Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis dari daftar saluran, saluran yang baru ditemukan ditandai dengan (bintang). Jika Anda mengunci sebuah saluran, saluran itu akan ditandai dengan tanda (gembok). Stasiun radio Jika siaran digital tersedia, stasiun radio digital akan diinstal saat penginstalan. Beralihlah ke saluran radio seperti halnya Anda beralih ke saluran TV. Penginstalan saluran Kabel (DVB-C) biasanya menggunakan stasiun radio dari nomor saluran 1001 ke atas. Hasil pencarian didaftar sebagai daftar saluran - lihat daftar nama di bagian atas. Hasil pencarian menghilang setelah Anda memilih daftar saluran lain atau menutup daftar dan hasil pencarian. TV ini dapat menerima DVB standar televisi digital. TV mungkin tidak bekerja dengan benar dengan beberapa operator televisi digital, tidak sesuai kelengkapannya dengan ketentuan standar. 4.3 Filter Daftar Saluran Buka Daftar Saluran Anda dapat memfilter sebuah daftar lengkap dengan semua salurannya. Anda dapat mengatur daftar saluran untuk menampilkan saluran TV saja atau stasiun Radio saja. Untuk saluran Antena/Kabel Anda dapat mengatur daftar untuk menampilkan saluran Free-to-Air (gratis) atau Diacak (berbayar). Di sebelah daftar yang berisi semua saluran, Anda dapat memilih daftar yang telah difilter atau Anda dapat memilih salah satu dari daftar favorit yang Anda buat. Untuk membuka daftar saluran yang sedang aktif saat ini Untuk mengatur filter pada sebuah daftar dengan semua salurannya 1 - Tekan, beralih ke TV. 10

11 1 - Tekan. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran yang saat ini aktif. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS. 4 - Pilih Pilih Daftar Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Filter Saluran Antena atau Filter Saluran Kabel berdasarkan daftar yang ingin Anda filter, dan 6 - Pada menu Opsi, pilih filter yang Anda inginkan dan tekan OK untuk mengaktifkan. Nama filter muncul sebagai bagian dari nama daftar saluran di atas daftar saluran. 7 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan untuk menutup menu. 5 - Masukkan kode PIN 4 digit jika TV Anda meminta begitu. Saluran yang dikunci akan ditandai dengan (gembok). 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk membuka kunci saluran 1 - Tekan. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran. Jika perlu, ganti daftar saluran. 3 - Pilih saluran yang ingin Anda buka kuncinya. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Buka Kunci Saluran dan 5 - Masukkan kode PIN 4 digit jika TV Anda meminta begitu. 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 4.4 Menonton saluran Jika Anda mengunci atau membuka kunci saluran di daftar saluran, Anda hanya perlu memasukkan kode PIN cukup sekali sampai Anda menutup daftar saluran. Mencari Suatu Saluran Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Penguncian Anak untuk informasi selengkapnya. Untuk mulai menonton saluran TV, tekan. TV akan mencari saluran yang terakhir Anda tonton. Beralih Saluran Untuk beralih saluran, tekan atau. Jika Anda tahu nomor salurannya, ketik nomornya dengan tombol angka. Tekan OK setelah Anda memasukkan angka untuk langsung beralih. Peringkat Orang Tua Agar anak-anak tidak menonton program yang tidak sesuai dengan usia mereka, Anda dapat mengatur peringkat usia. Jika informasi tersedia dari Internet, TV akan menampilkan nama dan detail program saat ini yang diikuti dengan nama dan detail program berikutnya. Program saluran digital bisa diberi peringkat usia. Jika peringkat usia program setara atau lebih tinggi daripada usia yang telah Anda atur sebagai peringkat usia untuk anak Anda, program akan dikunci. Untuk menonton program yang dikunci, Anda harus memasukkan kode Peringkat org tua terlebih dahulu. Saluran sebelumnya Untuk beralih kembali ke saluran yang sebelumnya dicari, tekan BACK. Anda juga dapat beralih ke saluran dari Daftar Saluran. Untuk mengatur peringkat usia 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Penguncian Anak > Peringkat Org Tua dan 3 - Masukkan kode penguncian Anak 4-angka. Jika Anda belum mengatur kodenya, pilih Atur Kode di Penguncian Anak. Sekarang masukkan kode penguncian Anak 4-angka dan konfirmasi. Sekarang Anda bisa mengatur peringkat usia. 4 - Kembali ke Penguncian Orang Tua, pilih usia dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Mengunci Saluran Mengunci dan Membuka Kunci Saluran Agar anak-anak tidak menonton saluran tertentu, Anda bisa mengunci saluran. Untuk menonton saluran yang dikunci, Anda harus terlebih dahulu memasukkan kode PIN Penguncian Anak 4 digit. Anda tidak bisa mengunci program dari perangkat yang tersambung. Untuk mengunci saluran Untuk menonaktifkan peringkat usia orang tua, pilih Tidak Ada. Namun, di beberapa negara Anda harus mengatur peringkat usia. 1 - Tekan. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran. Jika perlu, ganti daftar saluran. 3 - Pilih saluran yang ingin Anda kunci. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Kunci Saluran dan Untuk beberapa stasiun penyiaran/operator, TV hanya akan mengunci program dengan peringkat yang lebih tinggi. Peringkat usia orang tua diatur 11

12 untuk semua saluran. digital, beralihlah ke saluran tersebut dan buka Informasi di OPTIONS. Opsi Saluran Bahasa Terjemahan Buka Opsi Bahasa Terjemahan yang Lebih Dipilih Saat menonton saluran, Anda bisa mengatur beberapa opsi. Siaran digital dapat menawarkan beberapa bahasa terjemahan untuk sebuah program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa terjemahan primer dan sekunder pilihan Anda. Jika terjemahan di salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan menampilkan terjemahan yang Anda pilih. Anda dapat memilih beberapa opsi, bergantung pada jenis saluran yang Anda tonton (analog atau digital) atau bergantung pada pengaturan TV yang Anda buat. Untuk membuka menu opsi Untuk menetapkan bahasa terjemahan primer dan sekunder 1 - Saat menonton saluran, tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS lagi untuk menutup. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Wilayah dan Bahasa > Bahasa > Terjemahan Primer atau Terjemahan Sekunder. 3 - Pilih bahasa yang Anda perlukan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Terjemahan Mengaktifkan Stasiun penyiaran digital dapat dilengkapi terjemahan untuk programnya. Untuk menampilkan terjemahan Memilih Bahasa Terjemahan Tekan SUBTITLE. Jika bahasa terjemahan yang diinginkan tidak tersedia, Anda dapat memilih bahasa terjemahan lain apabila tersedia. Jika bahasa terjemahan tidak tersedia, Anda tidak dapat memilih opsi ini. Anda dapat mengalihkan terjemahan ke On atau Off. Alternatifnya, Anda dapat memilih Otomatis. Otomatis Untuk memilih bahasa terjemahan saat tidak ada bahasa pilihan Anda yang tersedia Jika informasi bahasa adalah bagian dari siaran digital dan program yang disiarkan tidak diatur dalam bahasa Anda (bahasa yang diatur di TV), TV dapat menampilkan terjemahan secara otomatis dalam salah satu bahasa terjemahan yang dipilih. Salah satu bahasa terjemahan ini harus juga menjadi bagian dari siaran. 1 - Tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih Bahasa Terjemahan dan pilih salah satu bahasa sebagai bahasa terjemahan untuk sementara waktu. Anda dapat memilih bahasa terjemahan pilihan di Bahasa Terjemahan. Bahasa Audio Bahasa Audio yang Dipilih Siaran digital dapat menawarkan beberapa bahasa audio (bahasa lisan) untuk suatu program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa audio primer dan sekunder yang Anda pilih. Jika audio pada salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan beralih ke bahasa audio tersebut. Terjemahan dari Teks Jika Anda menyetel saluran analog, Anda harus menyediakan terjemahan untuk tiap saluran secara manual. 1 - Beralihlah ke satu saluran dan tekan TEXT untuk membuka Teks. 2 - Masukkan nomor halaman untuk terjemahan, biasanya Tekan TEXT lagi untuk menutup Teks. Untuk menetapkan bahasa audio primer dan sekunder 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Wilayah dan Bahasa dan pilih Bahasa > Audio Primer atau Audio Sekunder. 3 - Pilih bahasa yang Anda perlukan dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau Jika Anda memilih Aktif di menu Terjemahan saat menonton saluran analog ini, terjemahan akan ditampilkan jika tersedia. Untuk mengetahui apakah saluran itu analog atau 12

13 tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Mono / Stereo Memilih Bahasa Audio Anda dapat mengalihkan suara saluran analog ke Mono atau Stereo. Untuk beralih ke Mono atau Stereo Jika bahasa audio yang diinginkan tidak tersedia, Anda dapat memilih bahasa audio lain apabila tersedia. Jika bahasa audio tidak tersedia, tidak dapat memilih opsi ini. 1 - Cari saluran analog. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Mono/Stereo dan tekan (kanan). 3 - Pilih Mono atau Stereo dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk memilih bahasa audio saat tidak ada bahasa pilihan Anda yang tersedia 1 - Tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih Bahasa Audio dan pilih salah satu bahasa sebagai bahasa audio untuk sementara waktu. Mengubah Urutan Saluran Hanya di Daftar Favorit Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran (ubah susunan). Antarmuka Umum Jika Anda memasang CAM di salah slot Common Interface, Anda dapat melihat CAM dan informasi operator atau melakukan beberapa pengaturan terkait CAM. Untuk mengubah urutan saluran 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ubah Urutan Saluran dan 3 - Di Daftar Favorit, pilih saluran yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya dan 4 - Dengan tombol (naik) atau (turun) pindahkan saluran ke tempat yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi lokasi baru. 6 - Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran dengan metode yang sama sampai Anda menutup Daftar Favorit dengan tombol BACK. Untuk melihat informasi CAM 1 - Tekan SOURCES. 2 - Pilih jenis saluran yang CAM-nya Anda gunakan untuk Tonton TV. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Antarmuka Umum. 4 - Pilih slot Antarmuka Umum yang sesuai dan tekan (kanan). 5 - Pilih operator TV CAM dan Layar berikut ini muncul dari operator TV. 4.5 Saluran Favorit HbbTV pada Saluran ini Jika Anda ingin menghindari akses ke halaman HbbTV pada saluran tertentu, Anda dapat memblokir halaman HbbTV untuk saluran ini saja. Tentang Saluran Favorit Dalam daftar saluran favorit, Anda dapat mengumpulkan saluran yang Anda inginkan. Mengaktifkan HbbTV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > HbbTV > Aktif. Anda dapat membuat 4 daftar saluran favorit yang berbeda untuk berpindah saluran dengan mudah. Anda dapat menamai masing-masing Daftar Favorit secara berbeda. Hanya di Daftar Favorit yang salurannya bisa Anda urutkan ulang. Informasi Dengan Daftar Favorit dipilih, tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk memilih saluran, lalu tekan OK untuk menonton saluran yang dipilih. Anda hanya bisa menonton saluran yang ada di dalam daftar tersebut jika menggunakan tombol atau. Anda dapat melihat karakteristik teknis dari saluran tertentu, seperti digital atau analog, jenis suara, dll. Untuk melihat informasi teknis pada suatu saluran 1 - Cari saluran. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Informasi dan 3 - Untuk menutup layar ini, 13

14 Membuat Daftar Favorit Mengganti Nama Daftar Favorit Untuk membuat daftar saluran favorit Anda hanya dapat mengubah nama Daftar Favorit. 1 - Tekan, beralih ke TV. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka daftar saluran yang saat ini aktif. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS. 4 - Pilih Buat Daftar Favorit dan 5 - Di daftar pada sebelah kiri, pilih saluran yang Anda inginkan sebagai favorit dan Saluran tercantum di daftar di sebelah kanan sesuai urutan penambahannya. Untuk mengurungkannya, pilih saluran di daftar di sebelah kiri dan tekan OK lagi. 6 - Jika perlu, Anda bisa melanjutkan pemilihan dan penambahan saluran sebagai favorit. 7 - Untuk menyelesaikan penambahan saluran, tekan BACK. Untuk mengubah nama Daftar Favorit 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang namanya ingin Anda ubah. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ubah Nama Daftar Favorit dan 3 - Gunakan keyboard pada layar untuk menghapus nama saat ini dan memasukkan nama baru. 4 - Jika selesai, pilih Tutup dan 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup daftar saluran. Menghapus Daftar Favorit Anda hanya dapat menghapus Daftar Favorit. TV akan meminta penggantian nama Daftar Favorit. Anda dapat menggunakan keyboard pada layar. Untuk menghapus Daftar Favorit 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang ingin Anda hapus. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Hapus Daftar Favorit dan 3 - Konfirmasi untuk menghapus daftar tersebut. 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup daftar saluran. 1 - Gunakan keyboard pada layar untuk menghapus nama saat ini dan memasukkan nama baru. 2 - Jika selesai, pilih Tutup dan TV akan beralih ke Daftar Favorit yang baru dibuat tersebut. Anda dapat menambahkan serangkaian saluran dalam sekali jalan atau memulai Daftar Favorit dengan menggandakan suatu daftar saluran dengan semua salurannya dan menghapus saluran yang tidak Anda inginkan. Mengubah Urutan Saluran Hanya di Daftar Favorit Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran (ubah susunan). Saluran di Daftar Favorit dinomori ulang. Untuk mengubah urutan saluran 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ubah Urutan Saluran dan 3 - Di Daftar Favorit, pilih saluran yang ingin Anda ubah urutannya dan 4 - Dengan tombol (naik) atau (turun) pindahkan saluran ke tempat yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi lokasi baru. 6 - Anda dapat mengubah urutan saluran dengan metode yang sama sampai Anda menutup Daftar Favorit dengan tombol BACK. Menambahkan Rentang Saluran Untuk menambahkan rentang saluran yang berurutan ke Daftar Favorit dalam sekali jalan, Anda dapat menggunakan Pilih Rentang. Untuk menambahkan rentang saluran 1 - Buka Daftar Favorit di tempat Anda ingin menambahkan rentang saluran. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Pilih Rentang dan 3 - Di daftar di sebelah kiri pilih saluran pertama pada rentang yang ingin Anda tambahkan dan 4 - Tekan (turun) untuk memilih saluran terakhir dari rentang yang ingin Anda tambahkan. Saluran ditandai di sebelah kiri. 5 - Tekan OK untuk menambahkan rentang saluran ini dan konfirmasi. 4.6 Teks/Teleteks Halaman Teks Untuk membuka Teks/Teleteks, tekan TEXT, saat Anda menonton saluran TV. Untuk menutup Teks, tekan TEXT lagi. Anda juga dapat mulai membuat Daftar Favorit dari Pilih Rentang. Memilih halaman Teks Untuk memilih halaman... 14

15 1 - Masukkan nomor halaman dengan tombol angka. 2 - Gunakan tombol panah untuk menavigasi. 3 - Tekan tombol warna untuk memilih subjek berkode warna di bagian bawah layar. menggunakan tombol angka, warna dan panah untuk memilih dan menavigasi. Untuk menutup Teks Digital, tekan BACK. Subhalaman teks Nomor halaman teks dapat menyimpan beberapa subhalaman. Nomor subhalaman ditampilkan pada panel di sebelah nomor halaman utama. Untuk memilih subhalaman, tekan atau. Opsi Teks Ikhtisar. Halaman teks Bekukan halaman Untuk menghentikan rotasi otomatis subhalaman. Dua layar/layar penuh Untuk menampilkan saluran TV dan Teks saling bersebelahan. Ikhtisar T.O.P. Untuk membuka halaman Teks T.O.P Perbesar Untuk memperbesar halaman Teks agar nyaman dibaca. Tampilkan Untuk memperlihatkan informasi yang tersembunyi di halaman. Gulir subhalaman Untuk menggulir subhalaman saat tersedia. Menyembunyikan/Menampilkan Halaman Favorit Untuk menyembunyikan atau menampilkan daftar halaman favorit. Hapus Halaman Favorit Untuk menghapus daftar halaman favorit. Bahasa Untuk mengalihkan grup karakter yang digunakan Teks untuk ditampilkan dengan benar. Teks 2,5 Untuk mengaktifkan Teks 2,5 agar warna lebih banyak dan grafik lebih baik. Pada Teks/Teleteks, tekan OPTIONS untuk memilih berikut ini Beberapa stasiun penyiaran menawarkan Teks T.O.P Untuk membuka halaman Teks Halaman teks di dalam Teks, tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Ikhtisar T.O.P.. Halaman favorit TV membuat daftar 10 halaman Teks terakhir yang Anda buka. Anda dapat dengan mudah membuka kembali halaman tersebut di kolom halaman Teks Favorit. 1 - Dalam Teks, pilih (hati) di sudut kiri atas layar untuk menampilkan kolom halaman favorit. 2 - Tekan (turun) atau (naik) untuk memilih nomor halaman dan tekan OK untuk membuka halaman. Anda dapat menghapus daftar dengan opsi Hapus Halaman Favorit. Mencari Teks Anda dapat memilih sebuah kata dan memindai Teks untuk semua kemunculan kata ini. 1 - Buka halaman Teks dan 2 - Pilih kata atau angka menggunakan tanda panah. 3 - Tekan OK lagi untuk langsung melompat ke kemunculan berikutnya dari kata atau angka ini. 4 - Tekan OK lagi untuk melompat ke kemunculan berikutnya. 5 - Untuk menghentikan pencarian, tekan (naik) hingga tidak ada yang dipilih. Konfigurasi Teks Bahasa teks Teks dari perangkat yang tersambung Beberapa stasiun penyiaran TV digital menyediakan beberapa bahasa Teks. Untuk mengatur bahasa Teks primer dan sekunder Anda... Beberapa perangkat yang menerima saluran TV juga dapat menghadirkan Teks. Untuk membuka Teks dari perangkat yang tersambung Tekan SOURCES, pilih perangkat dan 2 - Saat menonton saluran di perangkat, tekan OPTIONS, pilih Tampilkan tombol perangkat dan pilih tombol dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menyembunyikan tombol perangkat. 4 - Untuk menutup Teks, tekan BACK lagi. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Wilayah dan Bahasa dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Bahasa > Teks Primer atau Teks Sekunder dan 4 - Pilih bahasa Teks yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Teks Digital (Inggris saja) Teks 2,5 Beberapa stasiun penyiaran digital menawarkan Teks Digital khusus atau TV interaktif di saluran TV digitalnya. Hal ini mencakup Teks normal yang Jika tersedia, Teks 2,5 menawarkan lebih banyak warna dan grafis yang lebih baik. Teks 2,5 diaktifkan 15

16 sebagai pengaturan pabrik standar. Untuk menonaktifkan Teks 2,5 1 - Tekan TEXT. 2 - Saat Teks/Teleteks terbuka di layar, tekan OPTIONS. 3 - Pilih Teks 2,5 > Tidak aktif dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 16

17 penyejajaran parabola antena Anda. Hal ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. Jika satelit ditemukan, nama dan kekuatan penerimaan ditampilkan di layar. 8 - Jika TV menemukan satelit yang Anda inginkan, pilih Pasang. 9 - Jika satelit menawarkan Paket Saluran, TV akan menampilkan paket yang tersedia untuk satelit tersebut. Pilih paket yang Anda perlukan. Beberapa paket menawarkan penginstalan Cepat atau Penuh untuk saluran yang tersedia, pilih salah satu. TV akan menginstal saluran satelit dan stasiun radio Untuk menyimpan konfigurasi satelit, saluran yang terinstal dan stasiun radio, pilih Selesai. 5 Penginstalan Saluran 5.1 Pemasangan Satelit Tentang Memasang Satelit Hingga 4 Satelit Anda dapat memasang hingga 4 satelit (4 LNB) pada TV ini. Pilih jumlah satelit pasti yang ingin Anda instal di permulaan penginstalan. Tindakan ini akan mempercepat penginstalan. Pengaturan Pemasangan Satelit Unicable Pengaturan pemasangan satelit dipreset sesuai negara Anda. Pengaturan ini menentukan bagaimana TV mencari dan memasang satelit serta salurannya. Anda selalu bisa mengubah pengaturan ini. Anda dapat menggunakan sistem Unicable untuk menyambungkan antena parabola ke TV. Anda dapat memilih 1 atau 2 satelit di awal pemasangan. MDU - Multi-Dwelling-Unit Untuk mengubah pengaturan pemasangan satelit Tuner satelit bawaan mendukung MDU pada satelit Astra dan Digiturk pada satelit Eutelsat. MDU pada Türksat tidak didukung. 1 - Mulai pemasangan satelit. 2 - Di layar tempat Anda bisa mencari satelit, pilih Pengaturan dan 3 - Pilih jumlah satelit yang ingin Anda pasang atau pilih salah satu sistem Unicable. Jika Anda memilih Unicable, Anda dapat memilih Nomor Pita Pengguna dan memasukkan Frekuensi Pita Pengguna untuk tiap tuner. 4 - Jika selesai, pilih Berikutnya dan 5 - Di menu Pengaturan, tekan tombol berwarna Selesai untuk kembali ke layar untuk mulai mencari satelit. Memulai Penginstalan Pastikan parabola satelit Anda tersambung dengan tepat dan disejajarkan dengan baik sebelum memulai penginstalan. Untuk memulai pemasangan satelit 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 3 - Pilih Cari Satelit dan 4 - Pilih Cari dan TV akan mencari satelit. 5 - Pilih Instal dan TV menampilkan konfigurasi pemasangan satelit saat ini. Jika Anda ingin mengubah konfigurasi ini, pilih Pengaturan. Jika Anda tidak ingin mengubah konfigurasi, pilih Cari. Lanjutkan ke langkah 5. Transponder Rumah dan LNB Di beberapa negara, Anda bisa menyesuaikan pengaturan mahir untuk transponder rumah dan setiap LNB. Hanya gunakan atau ubah pengaturan ini jika penginstalan normal gagal dilakukan. Jika Anda menggunakan peralatan satelit non-standar, Anda bisa menggunakan pengaturan ini untuk membatalkan pengaturan standar. Beberapa penyedia mungkin memberi Anda beberapa nilai transponder atau LNB yang bisa dimasukkan di sini. 6 - Di Sistem Penginstalan, pilih jumlah satelit yang ingin Anda instal atau pilih salah satu sistem Unicable. Jika Anda memilih Unicable, Anda dapat memilih Nomor Pita Pengguna dan memasukkan Frekuensi Pita Pengguna untuk tiap tuner. Di beberapa negara, Anda dapat menyesuaikan beberapa pengaturan mahir untuk tiap LNB di Pengaturan Selengkapnya. 7 - TV akan mencari satelit yang tersedia saat CAM Satelit Jika Anda menggunakan CAM Modul Akses Bersyarat dengan kartu pintar untuk menonton saluran satelit, sebaiknya melakukan penginstalan satelit dengan CAM terpasang pada TV. Sebagian besar CAM digunakan untuk mengatasi saluran yang diacak. 17

18 CAM generasi terbaru (CI+ 1.3 dengan Profil Operator), dapat menginstal semua saluran satelit sendiri pada TV Anda. CAM akan mengundang Anda untuk menginstal satelit dan salurannya. CAM tersebut tidak hanya menginstal dan mengurut saluran tetapi juga menangani pembaruan saluran secara berkala. switchbox Unicable yang menawarkan 4 atau 8 pita pengguna. Jika Anda memilih Unicable di pengaturan, TV akan meminta Anda untuk menetapkan nomor pita pengguna yang unik untuk tiap tuner satelit bawaan. Tuner satelit tidak boleh memiliki nomor pita pengguna yang sama dengan satelit lain di sistem Unicable. Paket Saluran Frekuensi Pita Pengguna Operator satelit dapat menawarkan paket saluran yang menyatukan saluran gratis (tayangan gratis) dan menawarkan urutan yang sesuai dengan negara. Beberapa satelit menawarkan paket langganan kumpulan saluran berbayar. Di dekat nomor pita pengguna yang unik, penerima satelit bawaan memerlukan frekuensi dari nomor pita pengguna yang dipilih. Frekuensi tersebut sering ditampilkan di dekat nomor pita pengguna pada switchbox Unicable. Jika Anda memilih paket langganan, TV mungkin akan meminta Anda untuk memilih penginstalan Cepat atau Lengkap. Pilih Cepat untuk menginstal saluran paket saja atau pilih Penuh untuk menginstal paket dan juga semua saluran yang tersedia. Kami menyarankan penginstalan Cepat untuk paket langganan. Jika Anda memiliki satelit tambahan yang bukan termasuk dari paket langganan Anda, kami menyarankan penginstalan Penuh. Semua saluran yang diinstal disimpan di daftar saluran Semua. Pembaruan Saluran Manual Anda akan selalu dapat melakukan pembaruan saluran. Untuk memulai pembaruan saluran secara manual 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan 4 - Pilih Perbarui Saluran dan TV akan mulai melakukan pembaruan. Pembaruan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 5 - Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. Pembaruan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 6 - Pilih Selesai dan Konfigurasi Unicable Sistem Unicable Anda dapat menggunakan sistem Kabel Tunggal, MDU atau sistem Unicable untuk menyambungkan parabola antena ke TV. Sistem Kabel Tunggal menggunakan satu kabel untuk menyambungkan parabola antena ke semua tuner satelit di sistemnya. Sistem Kabel Tunggal biasanya digunakan di bangunan apartemen. Jika Anda menggunakan sistem Unicable, TV akan meminta Anda untuk menetapkan nomor pita pengguna dan frekuensi yang terkait saat penginstalan. Anda dapat menginstal 1 atau 2 satelit dengan Unicable pada TV ini. Menambah Satelit Anda dapat menambahkan satelit ke penginstalan satelit Anda saat ini. Satelit yang diinstal dan salurannya tidak berubah. Beberapa operator satelit tidak mengizinkan penambahan satelit. Jika Anda mengetahui beberapa saluran lenyap setelah penginstalan Unicable, penginstalan lain mungkin telah dilakukan di saat yang sama pada sistem Unicable. Lakukan penginstalan lagi untuk menginstal saluran yang hilang. Satelit tambahan akan terlihat sebagai ekstra, satelit tambahan bukanlah langganan satelit utama atau bukan satelit utama yang Anda gunakan paket salurannya. Biasanya, Anda akan menambah satelit ke-4 setelah menginstal 3 satelit. Jika sudah menginstal 4 satelit, Anda mungkin mempertimbangkan untuk menghapus satu satelit agar dapat menambah satelit baru. Nomor Pita Pengguna Mengonfigurasi Di sistem Unicable, tiap tuner satelit yang tersambung harus diberi nomor (misalnya, 0, 1, 2 atau 3 dll.). Jika Anda saat ini hanya menginstal 1 atau 2 satelit, pengaturan penginstalan saat ini mungkin tidak mengizinkan penambahan satelit ekstra. Jika Anda perlu mengubah pengaturan penginstalan, Anda harus mengulangi penginstalan satelit lengkap. Anda tidak dapat menggunakan Tambah satelit jika Anda dapat menemukan pita pengguna yang tersedia beserta nomornya di switchbox Unicable. Pita pengguna terkadang disingkat dengan UB. Ada 18

19 pengaturan perlu diubah. 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Pemasangan Manual dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 4 - Jika lebih dari 1 satelit yang terinstal, pilih LNB yang ingin Anda tambah salurannya. 5 - Atur Polarisasi yang Anda perlukan. Jika Anda mengatur Mode Kecepatan Simbol ke Manual, Anda dapat memasukkan peringkat simbol di Peringkat Simbol secara manual. 6 - Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan frekuensi, dan pilih Selesai. 7 - Pilih Cari dan Kekuatan sinyal ditampilkan di layar. 8 - Jika Anda ingin menyimpan saluran transponder baru, pilih Simpan dan 9 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Untuk menambah satelit 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Cari satelit dan 4 - Pilih Tambah Satelit dan Satelit saat ini ditampilkan. 5 - Pilih Cari dan TV akan mencari satelit baru. 6 - Jika TV menemukan satu atau beberapa satelit, pilih Instal dan TV akan menginstal saluran dari satelit yang ditemukan. 7 - Pilih Selesai dan tekan OK untuk menyimpan saluran dan stasiun radio. Menghapus Satelit Anda dapat menghapus satu atau beberapa satelit dari penginstalan satelit saat ini. Anda menghapus satelit dan salurannya. Beberapa operator satelit tidak mengizinkan penghapusan satelit. Transponder Rumah dan LNB Di beberapa negara, Anda bisa menyesuaikan pengaturan mahir untuk transponder rumah dan setiap LNB. Hanya gunakan atau ubah pengaturan ini jika penginstalan normal gagal dilakukan. Jika Anda menggunakan peralatan satelit non-standar, Anda bisa menggunakan pengaturan ini untuk membatalkan pengaturan standar. Beberapa penyedia mungkin memberi Anda beberapa nilai transponder atau LNB yang bisa dimasukkan di sini. Untuk menghapus satelit 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Satelit dan 3 - Pilih Cari satelit dan 4 - Pilih Hapus Satelit dan Satelit saat ini ditampilkan. 5 - Pilih satelit dan tekan OK untuk memberi tanda atau batal memberi tanda untuk dihapus. 6 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Daya LNB Secara default, Daya LNB diatur ke Aktif. Nada 22 khz Secara default, Nada diatur ke Otomatis. Frekuensi LO Rendah/Frekuensi LO Tinggi Penginstalan Manual Frekuensi osilator lokal diatur ke nilai Standar. Sesuaikan nilai hanya pada kasus peralatan tertentu yang memerlukan nilai berbeda. Penginstalan Manual dimaksudkan untuk pengguna ahli. Anda dapat menggunakan Penginstalan Manual untuk mempercepat penambahan saluran baru dari transponder satelit. Anda perlu mengetahui frekuensi dan polarisasi transponder. TV akan menginstal semua saluran transponder tersebut. Jika transponder sebelumnya telah diinstal, semua salurannya transponder sebelumnya dan yang baru - dipindah ke bagian akhir daftar saluran Semua. Anda tidak dapat menggunakan penginstalan Manual bila perlu mengubah nomor satelit. Jika diperlukan, Anda harus melakukan penginstalan lengkap dengan Instal Satelit. Permasalahan TV tidak dapat menemukan satelit yang saya inginkan atau TV menginstal satelit yang sama dua kali Pastikan jumlah satelit yang benar diatur di Pengaturan pada awal penginstalan. Anda dapat mengatur TV untuk mencari Satu, Dua atau 3/4 satelit. LNB dua kepala tidak dapat menemukan satelit kedua Untuk menginstal transponder Jika TV menemukan satu satelit tetapi tidak dapat menemukan satelit kedua, putar antena parabola 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 19

20 beberapa derajat. Luruskan antena parabola untuk mendapatkan sinyal terkuat pada satelit pertama. Periksalah indikator kekuatan sinyal satelit pertama di layar. Setelah satelit pertama diatur ke sinyal terkuat, pilih Cari lagi untuk menemukan satelit kedua. Pastikan pengaturan diatur ke Dua Satelit. Untuk menonaktifkan pembaruan otomatis 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis dan 5 - Pilih Tidak aktif dan 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Mengubah pengaturan penginstalan tidak akan menyelesaikan masalah saya Semua pengaturan, satelit dan saluran hanya disimpan di akhir penginstalan ketika Anda selesai. Semua saluran satelit hilang Saat saluran baru ditemukan atau jika saluran diperbarui atau dihapus, akan muncul pesan pada saat penyalaan TV. Agar pesan ini tidak muncul setelah tiap kali pembaruan saluran, Anda dapat menonaktifkannya. Jika menggunakan sistem Unicable, pastikan Anda menetapkan dua nomor pita pengguna yang unik untuk kedua tuner bawaan di pengaturan Unicable. Mungkin penerima satelit lain di sistem Unicable Anda menggunakan nomor pita pengguna yang sama. Untuk menonaktifkan pesan Beberapa saluran satelit sepertinya hilang dari daftar 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Pesan Pembaruan Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Tidak aktif dan 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. saluran Jika beberapa saluran terlihat hilang atau berpindah, mungkin stasiun penyiaran mengubah lokasi transponder saluran ini. Untuk mengembalikan posisi saluran di daftar saluran, Anda dapat mencoba untuk memperbarui paket saluran. Saya tidak dapat menghapus satelit Di beberapa negara, pembaruan saluran Otomatis dilakukan saat menonton TV atau saat TV dalam status siaga. Paket langganan tidak memungkinkan penghapusan satelit. Untuk menghapus satelit, Anda harus melakukan penginstalan lengkap lagi dan memilih paket lain. Ada kalanya penerimaan buruk Pembaruan Saluran Manual Periksalah apakah antena parabola satelit terpasang dengan kuat. Angin kencang dapat menggerakkan antena parabola. Salju dan hujan dapat menurunkan tingkat penerimaan. Anda akan selalu dapat melakukan pembaruan saluran. Untuk memulai pembaruan saluran secara manual 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Mulai dan 6 - Pilih Perbarui Saluran Digital, pilih Berikutnya dan 7 - Pilih Mulai dan tekan OK untuk memperbarui saluran digital. Hal ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 8 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 5.2 Pemasangan Antena/Kabel Memperbarui Saluran Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis Jika Anda menerima saluran digital, Anda dapat mengatur TV agar memperbarui daftar saluran secara otomatis. Sekali dalam sehari, pada jam 6 pagi, TV memperbarui saluran dan menyimpan saluran baru. Saluran baru disimpan di Daftar Saluran dan ditandai dengan. Saluran tanpa sinyal dihapus. TV harus dalam status siaga untuk memperbarui saluran secara otomatis. Anda dapat menonaktifkan Pembaruan Saluran Otomatis. 20

21 Menginstal Ulang Saluran DVB-T atau DVB-C Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran Penerimaan DVB-T atau DVB-C Anda dapat menginstal ulang semua saluran dan membiarkan semua pengaturan TV lainnya. Saat penginstalan saluran, tepat sebelum Anda mencari saluran, Pilih Antena (DVB-T) atau Kabel (DVB-C). Antena DVB-T/T2 mencari saluran analog terestrial dan saluran DVB-T digital. Kabel DVB-C mencari saluran analog dan digital yang tersedia dari operator kabel DVB-C. Jika kode PIN diatur, Anda harus memasukkan kode ini agar dapat menginstal ulang saluran. Untuk menginstal ulang saluran 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Cari Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Mulai dan 6 - Pilih Instal Ulang Saluran, pilih Berikutnya dan 7 - Pilih negara tempat Anda berada sekarang dan 8 - Pilih Berikutnya dan 9 - Pilih jenis penginstalan yang Anda inginkan, Antena (DVB-T) atau Kabel (DVB-C) dan 8 - Pilih Berikutnya dan 11 - Pilih jenis saluran yang Anda inginkan, Saluran Digital dan Analog atau Hanya Saluran Digital dan 8 - Pilih Berikutnya dan 13 - Pilih Mulai dan tekan OK untuk memperbarui saluran digital. Hal ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Penginstalan Saluran DVB-C Untuk memudahkan penggunaan, semua pengaturan DVB-C diatur ke otomatis. Jika operator DVB-C Anda memberi Anda nilai DVB-C spesifik, ID jaringan atau frekuensi jaringan, masukkan nilai-nilai ini jika TV memintanya selama penginstalan. Konflik Nomor Saluran Di beberapa negara, saluran TV yang berbeda (stasiun penyiaran) mungkin memiliki nomor saluran yang sama. Saat menginstal, TV menampilkan daftar konflik nomor saluran. Anda harus memilih saluran TV mana yang ingin Anda instal pada nomor saluran dengan beberapa saluran TV. Pengaturan DVB Mode Frekuensi Jaringan Jika Anda bermaksud untuk menggunakan cara Pindai Cepat di Pemindaian Frek. untuk mencari saluran, pilih Otomatis. TV akan menggunakan 1 frekuensi jaringan yang telah ditetapkan (atau HC - saluran rumah) seperti yang digunakan oleh sebagian besar operator TV kabel di negara Anda. Menginstal Ulang TV Anda dapat menginstal ulang TV sepenuhnya. TV sepenuhnya diinstal ulang. Jika Anda menerima nilai frekuensi jaringan spesifik untuk mencari saluran, pilih Manual. Untuk menginstal ulang TV sepenuhnya 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Umum > Instal Ulang TV dan 3 - Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Ya dan tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi. 5 - TV akan diinstal ulang sepenuhnya. Semua pengaturan akan direset dan saluran yang diinstal akan diganti. Penginstalan ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. 6 - Tekan (kiri) untuk mundur satu langkah atau tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Frekuensi Jaringan Saat Mode Frekuensi Jaringan ditetapkan ke Manual, Anda dapat memasukkan nilai frekuensi jaringan yang diterima dari operator TV kabel di sini. Untuk memasukkan nilai, gunakan tombol angka. Pemindaian Frekuensi Pilih cara pencarian saluran. Anda dapat memilih cara Pindai Cepat yang lebih cepat dan menggunakan pengaturan yang telah ditetapkan yang digunakan oleh sebagian besar operator TV kabel di negara Anda. 21

22 Jika tidak ada saluran yang terinstal pada hasil pencarian atau jika beberapa saluran hilang, Anda dapat memilih cara Pemindaian Penuh lanjutan. Cara untuk mencari dan menginstal saluran ini akan menghabiskan lebih banyak waktu. ditampilkan untuk saluran ini. 6 - Pilih Cari kembali dan tekan OK untuk memeriksa kualitas sinyal frekuensi ini. Hasil uji ditampilkan di layar. Anda bisa mengubah posisi antena atau memeriksa sambungan untuk meningkatkan penerimaan. 7 - Anda juga bisa mengubah frekuensinya. Pilih nomor frekuensi satu per satu dan gunakan tombol (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengubah nilainya. Pilih Cari dan tekan OK untuk menguji penerimaan kembali. 8 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ukuran Langkah Frekuensi TV mencari saluran pada kelipatan 8MHz. Jika tidak ada saluran yang diinstal atau jika beberapa saluran hilang, Anda dapat mencari di kelipatan yang lebih kecil 1MHz. Menggunakan kelipatan 1MHz akan memerlukan waktu lebih lama untuk mencari dan menginstal saluran. Penginstalan Manual Saluran TV analog dapat diinstal secara manual, saluran demi saluran. Saluran Digital Jika Anda tahu operator TV kabel Anda tidak menawarkan saluran digital, Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran digital. Untuk menginstal saluran analog secara manual 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 3 - Pilih Analog: Penginstalan Manual dan Saluran Analog Jika Anda tahu operator TV kabel Anda tidak menawarkan saluran analog, Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran analog. Sistem Untuk mengonfigurasi sistem TV, pilih Sistem. Pilih negara atau bagian dunia tempat Anda berada sekarang dan Bebas/Acak Cari Saluran Untuk mencari saluran, pilih Cari Saluran dan Anda bisa memasukkan sendiri frekuensi untuk mencari saluran atau membiarkan TV yang mencari saluran. Tekan (kanan) untuk memilih Cari dan tekan OK untuk mencari saluran secara otomatis. Saluran yang ditemukan ditampilkan di layar dan jika penerimaannya buruk, tekan Cari lagi. Jika Anda ingin menyimpan saluran, pilih Selesai dan Jika Anda telah berlangganan dan memiliki CAM Modul Akses Bersyarat untuk layanan TV berbayar, pilih Bebas + Acak. Jika Anda tidak berlangganan untuk saluran atau layanan TV berbayar, Anda dapat memilih Saluran Bebas Saja. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari CAM, Modul Akses Bersyarat. Simpan Anda dapat menyimpan saluran pada nomor saluran saat ini atau sebagai nomor saluran baru. Pilih Simpan Saluran Saat Ini atau Simpan sbg Sal. Baru dan Nomor saluran baru ditampilkan sebentar. Kualitas Penerimaan Anda dapat memeriksa kualitas dan kekuatan sinyal saluran digital. Jika Anda memiliki antena sendiri, Anda dapat mengubah posisi antena untuk mencoba dan meningkatkan penerimaan. Anda dapat mengulangi langkah-langkah ini hingga Anda menemukan semua saluran TV analog yang tersedia. Untuk memeriksa kualitas penerimaan saluran digital 1 - Cari saluran. 2 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 3 - Pilih Saluran > Pemasangan Antena/Kabel dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 4 - Pilih Digital: Uji Penerimaan dan 5 - Pilih Cari dan Frekuensi digital akan 22

23 6 - Ketika penyalinan selesai, lepaskan flash drive USB. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 5.3 Salinan Daftar Saluran Pendahuluan Sekarang Anda dapat mengunggah daftar saluran yang disalin ke TV Philips lainnya. Salinan Daftar Saluran diperuntukkan untuk dealer dan pengguna mahir. Dengan Salinan Daftar Saluran, Anda dapat menyalin saluran yang terinstal di satu TV ke TV Philips lainnya dalam rentang yang sama. Dengan Salinan Daftar Saluran, Anda akan menghemat waktu yang diperlukan untuk pencarian saluran dengan mengunggah daftar saluran yang telah ditetapkan pada TV. Gunakan flash drive USB berkapasitas minimal 1 GB. Versi daftar saluran Periksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Salinan Daftar Saluran dan pilih Versi Saat Ini, lalu 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ketentuan Kedua TV dari rentang tahun yang sama. Kedua TV memiliki jenis perangkat keras yang sama. Periksa jenis perangkat keras di pelat jenis TV di bagian belakang. Biasanya tertulis Q... LA Kedua TV memiliki versi perangkat lunak yang kompatibel. Mengunggah Daftar Saluran Versi saluran saat ini Ke TV yang Belum Diinstal Untuk memeriksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran, pilih Salinan Daftar Saluran, pilih Versi Saat Ini dan 3 - Tekan OK untuk menutupnya. Ke TV yang belum diinstal 1 - Masukkan steker daya untuk memulai penginstalan dan memilih bahasa dan negara. Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan Daftar Saluran > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. Versi perangkat lunak terbaru Untuk memeriksa versi perangkat TV saat ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Info Prgkt lnk Skrg dan 4 - Versi, catatan rilis dan tanggal pembuatan akan ditampilkan. Selain itu, Nomor ESN Netflix juga ditampilkan, jika ada. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ke TV yang Sudah Diinstal Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. Menyalin Daftar Saluran Untuk menyalin daftar saluran Ke TV yang telah terinstal 1 - Verifikasi pengaturan negara TV. (Untuk memverifikasi pengaturan ini, lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran. Mulai prosedur ini hingga Anda sampai pada pengaturan negara. Tekan KEMBALI untuk membatalkan penginstalan.) Jika negaranya benar, lanjutkan ke langkah 2. Jika negaranya salah, Anda harus mengulangi 1 - Menyalakan TV. TV sudah terinstal saluran. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB. 3 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan Daftar Saluran dan 5 - Pilih Salin ke USB dan Anda mungkin diminta untuk memasukkan kode PIN Penguncian Anak untuk menyalin daftar saluran. 23

24 penginstalan. Lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran dan mulai penginstalan. Pilih negara yang tepat dan lewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. Jika selesai, lanjutkan ke langkah Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan Daftar Saluran > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. Menyalin Daftar Saluran Untuk menyalin daftar saluran Salinan daftar satelit 1 - Menyalakan TV. TV sudah terinstal saluran. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB. 3 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan daftar satelit dan 5 - Pilih Salin ke USB dan Anda mungkin diminta untuk memasukkan kode PIN Penguncian Anak untuk menyalin daftar saluran. 6 - Ketika penyalinan selesai, lepaskan flash drive USB. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Pendahuluan Sekarang Anda dapat mengunggah daftar saluran yang disalin ke TV Philips lainnya. 5.4 Salinan Daftar Saluran diperuntukkan untuk dealer dan pengguna mahir. Versi daftar saluran Dengan Salinan Daftar Saluran, Anda dapat menyalin saluran yang terinstal di satu TV ke TV Philips lainnya dalam rentang yang sama. Dengan Salinan Daftar Saluran, Anda akan menghemat waktu yang diperlukan untuk pencarian saluran dengan mengunggah daftar saluran yang telah ditetapkan pada TV. Gunakan flash drive USB berkapasitas minimal 1 GB. Periksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Salinan daftar satelit dan pilih Versi Saat Ini, lalu 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Ketentuan Kedua TV dari rentang tahun yang sama. Kedua TV memiliki jenis perangkat keras yang sama. Periksa jenis perangkat keras di pelat jenis TV di bagian belakang. Biasanya tertulis Q... LA Kedua TV memiliki versi perangkat lunak yang kompatibel. Mengunggah Daftar Saluran Versi saluran saat ini Ke TV yang Belum Diinstal Untuk memeriksa versi daftar saluran saat ini Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Saluran, pilih Salinan daftar satelit, pilih Versi Saat Ini dan 3 - Tekan OK untuk menutupnya. Ke TV yang belum diinstal 1 - Masukkan steker daya untuk memulai penginstalan dan memilih bahasa dan negara. Anda dapat melewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. 2 - Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan daftar satelit > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. Versi perangkat lunak terbaru Untuk memeriksa versi perangkat TV saat ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Info Prgkt lnk Skrg dan 4 - Versi, catatan rilis dan tanggal pembuatan akan ditampilkan. Selain itu, Nomor ESN Netflix juga ditampilkan, jika ada. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 24

25 Ke TV yang Sudah Diinstal Bergantung pada apakah TV Anda telah diinstal atau belum, Anda harus menggunakan cara berbeda untuk mengunggah daftar saluran. Ke TV yang telah terinstal 1 - Verifikasi pengaturan negara TV. (Untuk memverifikasi pengaturan ini, lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran. Mulai prosedur ini hingga Anda sampai pada pengaturan negara. Tekan KEMBALI untuk membatalkan penginstalan.) Jika negaranya benar, lanjutkan ke langkah 2. Jika negaranya salah, Anda harus mengulangi penginstalan. Lihat bab Menginstal Ulang Semua Saluran dan mulai penginstalan. Pilih negara yang tepat dan lewati pencarian saluran. Selesaikan penginstalan. Jika selesai, lanjutkan ke langkah Pasang flash drive USB yang menyimpan daftar saluran TV lainnya. 3 - Untuk mulai mengunggah daftar saluran, tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 4 - Pilih Saluran > Salinan daftar satelit > Salin ke TV dan Masukkan kode PIN jika perlu. 5 - TV memberi tahu Anda jika daftar saluran telah berhasil disalin ke TV. Cabut flash drive USB. 25

26 Kabel HDMI mendukung HDCP 2.2 (Perlindungan Konten Digital Bandwidth-tinggi). HDCP adalah sinyal perlindungan hak cipta yang mencegah penyalinan konten dari disk DVD atau Disk Blu-ray. Disebut juga sebagai DRM (Digital Rights Management/Manajemen Hak Digital ). 6 Menyambungkan Perangkat 6.1 Tentang Sambungan HDMI ARC Semua sambungan HDMI pada TV memiliki HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel). Panduan Konektivitas Jika perangkat, biasanya Sistem Home Theatre (HTS), juga memiliki sambungan HDMI ARC, sambungkan ke sambungan HDMI mana saja pada TV ini. Dengan sambungan HDMI ARC, Anda tidak perlu menyambungkan kabel audio ekstra yang mengirimkan suara dari gambar TV ke HTS. Sambungan HDMI ARC menggabungkan kedua sinyal tersebut. Selalu sambungkan perangkat pada TV dengan sambungan berkualitas tertinggi yang tersedia. Selain itu, gunakan kabel berkualitas bagus untuk memastikan transfer gambar dan suara berjalan baik. Saat Anda menyambungkan perangkat, TV mengenali jenisnya dan memberikan nama jenis yang tepat untuk masing-masing perangkat. Anda dapat mengubah nama jenis jika menginginkannya. Jika nama jenis yang tepat untuk sebuah perangkat sudah ditetapkan, TV secara otomatis beralih ke pengaturan TV yang ideal saat Anda beralih ke perangkat ini di menu Sumber. Anda dapat menggunakan sambungan HDMI mana saja pada TV ini untuk menyambungkan HTS namun ARC hanya tersedia untuk 1 perangkat/sambungan pada waktu bersamaan. HDMI MHL Dengan HDMI MHL, Anda dapat mengirim apa yang Anda lihat pada smartphone Android atau tablet ke layar TV Anda. Port antena Jika Anda memiliki Set-top box (penerima digital) atau Recorder, sambungkan kabel antena untuk mengarahkan sinyal antena melalui Set-top box dan/atau Recorder terlebih dahulu sebelum masuk ke TV. Dengan cara ini, antena dan Set-top box dapat mengirim kemungkinan saluran tambahan ke Recorder untuk melakukan perekaman. Sambungan HDMI 1 pada TV ini menggunakan MHL 2.0 (Mobile High-Definition Link). Sambungan kabel ini memiliki stabilitas dan bandwith tinggi, latensi rendah, tidak ada interferensi nirkabel dan reproduksi suara kualitas bagus. Selain itu, sambungan MHL akan mengisi daya baterai smartphone atau tablet Anda. Meskipun tersambung, perangkat mobile Anda tidak akan diisi dayanya jika TV dalam status siaga. Port HDMI Kualitas HDMI Sambungan HDMI memiliki kualitas gambar dan suara terbaik. Satu kabel HDMI menggabungkan sinyal video dan audio. Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk sinyal TV. Cari informasi apakah kabel MHL pasif sesuai untuk perangkat mobile Anda. Secara khusus, dengan konektor HDMI untuk TV pada satu sisi, pastikan jenis konektor yang perlu Anda sambungkan ke smartphone atau tablet. Untuk kualitas transfer sinyal terbaik, gunakan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi dan jangan menggunakan kabel HDMI yang panjangnya lebih dari 5 m. MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link dan Logo MHL adalah merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari MHL, LLC. Jika perangkat yang tersambung dengan HDMI tidak berfungsi dengan benar, periksa apakah pengaturan HDMI Ultra HD yang berbeda dapat mengatasi masalah ini. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari HDMI Ultra HD untuk informasi selengkapnya. Perlindungan hak cipta 26

27 Hubungi operator TV digital untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang syarat & ketentuannya. HDMI CEC - EasyLink Sambungan HDMI memiliki kualitas gambar dan suara terbaik. Satu kabel HDMI menggabungkan sinyal video dan audio. Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk sinyal TV High Definition (HD). Untuk kualitas transfer sinyal terbaik, gunakan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi dan jangan menggunakan kabel HDMI yang panjangnya lebih dari 5 m. Sambungkan perangkat yang kompatibel dengan HDMI CEC ke TV, Anda dapat mengoperasikannya dengan remote control TV. Kartu Pintar EasyLink HDMI CEC harus diaktifkan pada TV dan perangkat yang tersambung. Operator TV digital menyediakan modul CI+ (Modul Akses Bersyarat - CAM) dan kartu pintar yang disertai, saat Anda berlangganan program premiumnya. Mengaktifkan EasyLink Masukkan kartu pintar ke dalam modul CAM. Lihat petunjuk yang Anda terima dari operator. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > EasyLink > Aktif. Untuk memasukkan CAM pada TV 1 - Perhatikan CAM apakah metode untuk memasukkannya benar. Bila dimasukkan secara keliru, CAM dan TV bisa mengalami kerusakan. 2 - Sambil melihat bagian belakang TV, dengan bagian depan CAM menghadap ke arah Anda, masukkan CAM secara perlahan ke slot COMMON INTERFACE. 3 - Tekan masuk CAM sejauh mungkin. Biarkan CAM berada di slot secara permanen. Mengoperasikan perangkat yang kompatibel HDMI CEC dengan remote control TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > Remote control EasyLink > Aktif. Catatan: EasyLink mungkin tidak berfungsi pada perangkat dari merek lain. Fungsionalitas HDMI CEC memiliki nama yang berbeda pada merek yang berbeda. Beberapa contohnya adalah: Anynet, Aquos Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink dan Viera Link. Tidak semua merek sepenuhnya kompatibel dengan EasyLink. Contoh nama merek HDMI CEC adalah properti masing-masing pemiliknya. 6.2 CAM dengan Kartu Pintar CI+ Saat Anda menyalakan TV, dibutuhkan beberapa menit sebelum CAM aktif. Jika CAM dimasukkan dan biaya langganan telah dibayar (metode langganan bisa berbeda), Anda dapat menonton saluran yang diacak, yang didukung oleh kartu pintar CAM. CI+ TV ini siap digunakan untuk Akses Bersyarat CI+. Dengan CI+, Anda dapat menonton program HD premium, seperti film dan olahraga, yang ditawarkan oleh operator TV digital di wilayah Anda. Program ini diacak oleh operator TV dan diurutkan dengan modul CI+ prabayar. Operator TV digital menyediakan modul CI+ (Modul Akses Bersyarat - CAM) dan kartu pintar yang disertai, saat Anda berlangganan program premiumnya. Program ini dilengkapi tingkat perlindungan hak cipta yang tinggi. CAM dan kartu pintar eksklusif untuk TV Anda. Jika Anda melepaskan CAM, Anda tidak akan bisa menonton saluran yang diacak lagi, yang didukung oleh CAM. 27

28 memiliki pemrosesan suara DTS. Anda dapat memperbaikinya dengan mengatur Format Output Digital TV menjadi Stereo. 6.3 Sistem Home Theatre - HTS Tekan untuk Semua Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Digital. Menyambungkan dengan HDMI ARC Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan Sistem Home Theatre (HTS) ke TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan Soundbar Philips atau HTS dengan pemutar disk bawaan. Format Output Tidak ada suara Jika Anda tidak dapat mendengar suara dari TV di Sistem Home Theatre, periksa apakah Anda telah menyambungkan kabel HDMI ke sambungan HDMI ARC di Sistem Home Theatre. Semua sambungan HDMI pada TV adalah sambungan HDMI ARC. HDMI ARC Jika Sistem Home Theatre Anda dilengkapi sambungan HDMI ARC, Anda dapat menggunakan sabungan HDMI mana pun pada TV untuk menyambungkannya. Dengan HDMI ARC, Anda tidak perlu menyambungkan kabel audio tambahan. Sambungan HDMI ARC menggabungkan kedua sinyal tersebut. Semua sambungan HDMI pada TV dapat menghadirkan sinyal Audio Return Channel (ARC). Tetapi begitu Anda menyambungkan Sistem Home Theatre, TV hanya dapat mengirimkan sinyal ARC ke sambungan HDMI ini. 6.4 Smartphone dan Tablet Untuk menyambungkan smartphone atau tablet ke TV, Anda dapat menggunakan sambungan nirkabel atau kabel. Nirkabel Untuk sambungan nirkabel, pada smartphone atau tablet Anda unduhlah Aplikasi Remote Philips TV dari toko aplikasi pilihan Anda. Sinkronisasi audio ke video (sink) Jika suara tidak sesuai dengan video pada layar, Anda dapat mengatur penundaan pada sebagian besar Sistem Home Theatre dengan pemutar disk untuk menyesuaikan suara dengan video. Kabel Untuk sambungan kabel, gunakan sambungan HDMI 1 MHL di bagian belakang TV. Menyambungkan dengan HDMI 6.5 Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan Sistem Home Theatre (HTS) ke TV. Anda dapat menyambungkan Soundbar Philips atau HTS dengan pemutar disk bawaan. Pemutar Disk Blu-ray Jika Sistem Home Theatre tidak dilengkapi sambungan HDMI ARC, tambahkan kabel audio optik (Toslink) untuk mengirimkan suara gambar TV ke Sistem Home Theatre. Jika pemutar Disk Blu-ray dilengkapi HDMI CEC EasyLink, Anda dapat mengoperasikan pemutar dengan remote control TV. Gunakan kabel HDMI berkecepatan tinggi untuk menyambungkan pemutar Disk Blu-ray ke TV. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari HDMI CEC EasyLink untuk informasi selengkapnya. Sinkronisasi audio ke video (sink) Jika suara tidak sesuai dengan video pada layar, Anda dapat mengatur penundaan pada sebagian besar Sistem Home Theatre dengan pemutar disk untuk menyesuaikan suara dengan video. Y Pb Pr - Video Komponen adalah sambungan berkualitas tinggi. Sambungan YPbPr dapat digunakan untuk sinyal TV Definisi Tinggi (High Definition, HD). Masalah pada suara HTS Suara dengan noise keras Jika Anda menonton video dari flash drive USB yang dicolokkan atau komputer yang tersambung, suara dari Sistem Home Theatre Anda mungkin akan terdistorsi. Noise terdengar jika file audio atau video memiliki suara DTS tetapi Sistem Home Theatre tidak 28

29 speaker, dan perangkat audio lain. 6.6 Pemutar DVD Memilih Perangkat Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan pemutar DVD ke TV. Untuk memilih perangkat nirkabel Jika pemutar DVD tersambung dengan HDMI dan dilengkapi CEC EasyLink, Anda dapat mengoperasikan pemutar dengan remote control TV. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan 3 - Pilih Bluetooth > Cari perangkat dan 4 - Dalam daftar, pilih perangkat nirkabel dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang EasyLink, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari EasyLink HDMI CEC. Y Pb Pr - Video Komponen adalah sambungan berkualitas tinggi. Sambungan YPbPr dapat digunakan untuk sinyal TV Definisi Tinggi (High Definition, HD). Menghapus Perangkat Anda dapat menyambungkan atau memutus sambungan perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel. Anda juga dapat menghapus perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel. Jika Anda menghapus perangkat Bluetooth, perangkat tersebut tidak akan terpasang. 6.7 Bluetooth Memasangkan Perangkat Untuk menghapus atau memutuskan sambungan perangkat nirkabel... Bacalah panduan pengguna perangkat tentang informasi khusus mengenai pemasangan dan jarak nirkabel. Pastikan pengaturan Bluetooth pada TV diaktifkan. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan 3 - Pilih Bluetooth > Hapus Perangkat Bluetooth dan 4 - Dalam daftar, pilih perangkat nirkabel dan 5 - Pilih Putuskan atau Lepaskan dan 6 - Pilih OK dan tekan OK untuk mengonfirmasi. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Setelah gamepad nirkabel terpasang, Anda dapat menggunakannya. Saat perangkat terpasang, Anda tidak perlu memasangkannya lagi kecuali Anda melepas perangkat tersebut. Untuk memasangkan perangkat bluetooth dengan TV 1 - Aktifkan perangkat bluetooth dan tempatkan di posisi yang dapat dijangkau TV. 2 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 3 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 4 - Pilih Bluetooth > Cari Perangkat Bluetooth, dan 5 - Pilih Mulai dan Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. Anda dapat memasangkan perangkat tersebut dengan TV dan TV akan menyimpan sambungan tersebut. Anda mungkin perlu untuk memutuskan pemasangan perangkat yang dipasangkan terlebih dahulu jika jumlah maksimum perangkat yang dipasangkan tercapai. 6 - Pilih jenis perangkat dan 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 6.8 Headphone Anda dapat menyambungkan serangkaian headphone ke sambungan pada bagian belakang TV. Sambungan tersebut adalah jack-mini 3,5 mm. Anda dapat menyesuaikan volume headphone secara terpisah. Untuk menyesuaikan volume 1 - Tekan, pilih Volume Headphone dan 2 - Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. 3 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. TV Anda tidak mendukung subwoofer Bluetooth dan speaker Bluetooth. Koneksi HDMI diperlukan untuk sound bar, 29

30 Konsol Permainan Hard Drive USB HDMI Apa yang Anda Perlukan Untuk kualitas terbaik, sambungkan konsol permainan dengan kabel HDMI Berkecepatan tinggi ke TV. Jika Anda menyambungkan Hard Drive USB, Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran TV digital (siaran DVB atau semacamnya). Ruang Disk Minimum Untuk Menjeda Untuk menjeda siaran, Anda memerlukan Hard Drive yang kompatibel dengan USB 2.0 dengan ruang disk minimal 4 GB. Untuk Merekam Untuk menjeda dan merekam siaran, Anda memerlukan ruang disk minimal 250GB. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memasang Hard Drive USB, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Hard Drive USB, penginstalan. Pemasangan Y Pb Pr Sebelum Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran, Anda harus menyambungkan dan memformat Hard Drive USB. Memformat akan menghapus semua file dari Hard Drive USB. Sambungkan konsol permainan dengan kabel video komponen (Y Pb Pr) dan kabel audio L/R ke TV. 1 - Sambungkan Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV. Jangan menyambungkan perangkat USB lainnya ke port USB lain saat memformat. 2 - Hidupkan Hard Drive USB dan TV. 3 - Jika TV disetel ke saluran TV digital, tekan (Jeda). Mencoba menjeda akan memulai pemformatan. Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. Saat Hard Drive USB diformat, biarkan Hard Drive USB tersambung secara permanen. 30

31 dan Rekaman, jika tidak, pilih Aplikasi untuk menyimpan aplikasi. Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. 4 - Semua file dan data akan dihapus setelah memformat. 5 - Saat Hard Drive USB diformat, biarkan Hard Drive USB tersambung secara permanen. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Jeda TV, Rekaman, atau Aplikasi Keyboard USB Menyambungkan Peringatan Sambungkan keyboard USB (tipe USB-HID) untuk memasukkan teks ke TV Anda. Hard Drive USB diformat secara eksklusif untuk TV ini, sehingga Anda tidak dapat menggunakan rekaman yang disimpan pada TV atau PC lainnya. Jangan menyalin atau mengubah file di Hard Drive USB dengan aplikasi PC apa pun. Hal ini akan merusak rekaman Anda. Jika Anda memformat Hard Drive USB lainnya, konten pada Hard Drive USB sebelumnya akan hilang. Hard Drive USB yang terpasang di TV Anda akan perlu diformat ulang untuk digunakan dengan komputer. Gunakan salah satu sambungan USB untuk menyambungkan. Mengonfigurasi Memasang keyboard Untuk memasang keyboard USB, nyalakan TV dan sambungkan keyboard USB ke salah satu sambungan USB di TV. Jika TV mendeteksi keyboard untuk pertama kali, Anda dapat memilih tata letak keyboard Anda dan menguji pemilihan Anda. Jika Anda memilih tata letak keyboard Sirilik atau Yunani terlebih dahulu, Anda dapat memilih tata letak keyboard Latin sekunder. Memformat Sebelum Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran, Anda harus menyambungkan dan memformat Hard Drive USB. Memformat akan menghapus semua file dari Hard Drive USB. Jika Anda ingin merekam siaran dengan data Panduan TV dari Internet, Anda harus mengonfigurasi sambungan Internet terlebih dahulu sebelum memasang Hard Drive USB. Untuk mengubah pengaturan tata letak keyboard saat tata letak dipilih 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Umum dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Pengaturan Keyboard USB, dan tekan OK untuk memulai konfigurasi keyboard. Peringatan Hard Drive USB diformat secara eksklusif untuk TV ini, sehingga Anda tidak dapat menggunakan rekaman yang disimpan pada TV atau PC lainnya. Jangan menyalin atau mengubah file di Hard Drive USB dengan aplikasi PC apa pun. Hal ini akan merusak rekaman Anda. Jika Anda memformat Hard Drive USB lainnya, konten pada Hard Drive USB sebelumnya akan hilang. Hard Drive USB yang terpasang di TV Anda akan perlu diformat ulang untuk digunakan dengan komputer. Tombol Khusus Tombol untuk memasukkan teks Tombol Enter = OK Backspace = menghapus karakter sebelum kursor Tombol panah = berpindah-pindah di dalam bidang teks Untuk beralih antar tata letak keyboard, jika tata letak sekunder diatur, tekan tombol Ctrl + Bilah spasi secara bersamaan. Untuk memformat Hard Drive USB 1 - Sambungkan Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV. Jangan menyambungkan perangkat USB lainnya ke port USB lain saat memformat. 2 - Hidupkan Hard Drive USB dan TV. 3 - Pilih Rekaman jika Anda ingin melakukan Jeda TV Tombol untuk aplikasi dan halaman Internet Tab dan Shift + Tab = Selanjutnya dan Sebelumnya 31

32 Home = menggulir ke bagian atas halaman End = menggulir ke bagian bawah halaman Page Up = melompati satu halaman ke atas Page Down = melompati satu halaman ke bawah + = memperbesar satu langkah - = memperkecil satu langkah = menyesuaikan halaman web dengan lebar layar 6.13 Kamera Foto Untuk melihat foto yang tersimpan di kamera foto digital, Anda dapat menyambungkan kamera langsung ke TV. Gunakan salah satu sambungan USB pada TV untuk menyambungkan. Nyalakan kamera setelah disambungkan Flash Drive USB Jika daftar konten tidak otomatis muncul, tekan SOURCES dan pilih USB. Kamera Anda mungkin perlu diatur untuk mentransfer kontennya dengan PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol/Protokol Transfer Gambar). Baca buku petunjuk kamera foto digital. Anda dapat melihat foto atau memutar musik dan video dari flash drive USB yang tersambung. Masukkan flash drive USB di salah satu sambungan USB pada TV saat TV dihidupkan. Ultra HD pada USB Anda dapat melihat foto dengan resolusi Ultra HD dari perangkat USB atau flash drive yang tersambung. TV akan mengurangi resolusi ke Ultra HD jika resolusi foto lebih tinggi. Anda tidak dapat memutar video Ultra HD asli di salah satu sambungan USB. TV akan mendeteksi flash drive dan membuka daftar yang menampilkan kontennya. Jika daftar konten tidak otomatis muncul, tekan SOURCES dan pilih USB. Untuk berhenti menonton konten flash drive USB, tekan EXIT atau pilih aktivitas lain. Untuk melepas flash drive USB, Anda dapat menarik keluar flash drive kapan pun. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang melihat foto, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Foto, Video dan Musik. Ultra HD pada USB 6.14 Anda dapat melihat foto dengan resolusi Ultra HD dari perangkat USB atau flash drive yang tersambung. TV akan mengurangi resolusi ke Ultra HD jika resolusi foto lebih tinggi. Anda tidak dapat memutar video Ultra HD asli di salah satu sambungan USB. Camcorder Untuk kualitas terbaik, gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan camcorder ke TV. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menonton atau memutar konten dari flash drive USB, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Foto, Video dan Musik. 32

33 6.15 Komputer Menyambungkan Anda dapat menyambungkan komputer Anda ke TV dan menggunakan TV sebagai monitor PC. Dengan HDMI Gunakan kabel HDMI untuk menyambungkan komputer ke TV. Dengan DVI ke HDMI Alternatifnya, Anda dapat menggunakan adaptor DVI ke HDMI (dijual terpisah) untuk menyambungkan PC ke HDMI dan kabel audio L/R (jack mini 3,5 mm) ke AUDIO IN L/R di bagian belakang TV. Pengaturan Ideal Jika Anda menyambungkan komputer, sebaiknya Anda menamai sambungan tersebut, pada komputer yang tersambung, dengan nama jenis perangkat yang tepat di menu Sumber. Jika Anda kemudian beralih ke Komputer dalam menu Sumber, TV diatur ke pengaturan Komputer ideal secara otomatis. Untuk mengatur TV ke pengaturan ideal 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Gambar dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Lanjutan > Komputer, dan 4 - Pilih Aktif atau Tidak Aktif, dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 33

34 7 jar. > WPS. Menyambungkan TV Android Anda Jika router Anda memiliki WPS, Anda dapat langsung menyambungkannya ke router tanpa memindai jaringan. Jika Anda memiliki perangkat pada jaringan nirkabel yang menggunakan sistem enkripsi keamanan WEP, Anda tidak dapat menggunakan WPS Datangi router, tekan tombol WPS, dan kembali lagi ke TV dalam 2 menit. 2 - Pilih Sambungkan untuk membuat sambungan. 3 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Jaringan dan Internet Jaringan Rumah Untuk menikmati kemampuan TV Android Philips sepenuhnya, TV Anda harus tersambung ke internet. Membuat Sambungan - WPS dengan kode PIN Sambungkan TV ke jaringan rumah dengan sambungan Internet berkecepatan tinggi. Anda dapat menghubungkan TV Anda secara nirkabel atau berkabel ke router jaringan Anda. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Menyambung ke jar. > WPS dengan kode PIN. Jika router Anda memiliki WPS dengan kode PIN, Anda dapat langsung menyambungkannya ke router tanpa memindai jaringan. Jika Anda memiliki perangkat pada jaringan nirkabel yang menggunakan sistem enkripsi keamanan WEP, Anda tidak dapat menggunakan WPS. Menyambung ke Jaringan Sambungan Nirkabel Apa yang Anda Perlukan 1 - Tulis PIN 8-digit yang ditampilkan pada layar dan masukkan ke perangkat lunak router di PC Anda. Baca panduan router tentang tempat untuk memasukkan kode PIN di perangkat lunak router. 2 - Pilih Sambungkan untuk membuat sambungan. 3 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Untuk menyambungkan TV ke Internet secara nirkabel, Anda memerlukan router Wi-Fi yang tersambung ke Internet. Gunakan sambungan internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband). Membuat Sambungan Permasalahan Membuat Sambungan - Nirkabel Jaringan nirkabel tidak ditemukan atau terdistorsi Oven microwave, telepon DECT, atau perangkat WiFi b/g/n lain di sekitar Anda mungkin mengganggu jaringan nirkabel. Pastikan firewall di jaringan Anda memungkinkan akses ke sambungan nirkabel TV. Jika jaringan nirkabel tidak bekerja dengan tepat di rumah Anda, coba penginstalan jaringan berkabel. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Menyambung ke Jar. > Nirkabel. 1 - Di daftar hasil temuan jaringan, pilih jaringan nirkabel Anda. Jika jaringan tidak ada di daftar karena nama jaringan disembunyikan (Anda mematikan siaran SSID router), pilih Tambah Jaringan Baru untuk memasukkan sendiri nama jaringan Anda. 2 - Bergantung pada jenis router yang digunakan, masukkan kunci enkripsi Anda - WEP, WPA, atau WPA2. Jika Anda memasukkan kunci enkripsi untuk jaringan ini sebelumnya, Anda dapat memilih OK untuk segera membuat sambungan. 3 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Internet tidak berfungsi Jika sambungan ke router OK, periksa sambungan router ke Internet. PC dan sambungan Internet lambat Lihat informasi tentang jangkauan dalam ruangan, kecepatan transfer, dan faktor kualitas sinyal lainnya di buku petunjuk router nirkabel Anda. Gunakan sambungan Internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband) untuk router Anda. DHCP Jika sambungan gagal, Anda dapat memeriksa pengaturan DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) di router. DHCP harus diaktifkan. Membuat Sambungan - WPS (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Menyambung ke 34

35 Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Penyelesaian Masalah untuk informasi selengkapnya. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Konfigurasi Jaringan > IP Statis. Jika Anda pengguna mahir dan ingin menginstal jaringan dengan alamat IP Statis, atur TV ke IP Statis. Sambungan Berkabel Apa yang Anda Perlukan Konfigurasi Jaringan - Konfigurasi IP Statis Untuk menyambungkan TV ke Internet, Anda memerlukan router jaringan yang tersambung ke Internet. Gunakan sambungan internet berkecepatan tinggi (broadband). (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Konfigurasi Jaringan > Konfigurasi IP Statis. 1 - Pilih Konfigurasi IP Statis dan lakukan konfigurasi sambungan. 2 - Anda dapat menetapkan angka untuk Alamat IP, Netmask, Gateway, DNS 1, atau DNS 2. Menyalakan dengan Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Aktifkan dengan WiFi (WoWLAN). Anda dapat menyalakan TV ini dari smartphone atau tablet jika status TV adalah Siaga. Pengaturan Aktifkan dengan Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) harus dihidupkan. Membuat Sambungan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Jaringan > Kabel atau WiFi > Menyambung ke Jar. > Brkabel. Mengaktifkan sambungan Wi-Fi 1 - Sambungkan router ke TV dengan kabel jaringan (Kabel ethernet). 2 - Pastikan router dihidupkan. 3 - TV akan terus-terus mencari sambungan jaringan. 4 - Ketika sambungan berhasil, akan muncul sebuah pesan. Anda dapat mengaktifkan atau menonaktifkan sambungan Wi-Fi pada TV Anda. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi On/Off. Digital Media Renderer - DMR (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Digital Media Renderer - DMR. Jika sambungan gagal, Anda dapat memeriksa pengaturan DHCP router. DHCP harus diaktifkan. Untuk memenuhi peraturan EMC, gunakan Cat FTP berpelindung. Kabel ethernet 5E. Jika file media Anda tidak dapat diputar di TV, pastikan Digital Media Renderer telah diaktifkan. Berdasarkan pengaturan pabrik, DMR sudah diaktifkan. Pengaturan Jaringan Melihat Pengaturan Jaringan Nama Jaringan TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Lihat pengaturan jaringan. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Nama Jaringan TV. Jika Anda memiliki lebih dari satu TV di jaringan rumah, Anda dapat memberikan nama khusus untuk TV tersebut. Anda dapat melihat semua pengaturan jaringan saat ini di sini. Alamat IP dan MAC, kekuatan sinyal, kecepatan, metode enkripsi, dll. Menghapus Memori Internet Konfigurasi Jaringan - IP Statis (Menu TV) > 35 Pengaturan > Nirkabel dan

36 Jaringan > Kabel atau Wi-Fi > Hapus Memori Internet. Pengaturan Android Dengan Hapus Memori Internet, Anda menghapus pengaturan pendaftaran server Philips dan peringkat orang tua, login aplikasi toko video Anda, semua favorit Galeri Aplikasi Philips, penanda dan riwayat Internet. Aplikasi Interactive MHEG juga dapat menyimpan 'cookie', di TV Anda. File-file ini juga akan dihapus. Anda dapat mengatur atau melihat beberapa pengaturan atau informasi khusus Android. Anda dapat menemukan daftar aplikasi yang terinstal pada TV dan ruang penyimpanan yang dibutuhkan. Anda dapat mengatur bahasa yang ingin Anda gunakan dengan Pencarian Suara. Anda dapat mengonfigurasi keyboard pada layar atau memungkinkan aplikasi menggunakan lokasi Anda. Jelajahi pengaturan Android lain. Anda dapat mengunjungi untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang pengaturan ini. 7.2 Akun Google Untuk membuka pengaturan ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android, dan 3 - Jelajahi pengaturan Android lain. 4 - Tekan BACK jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Sign In Untuk menikmati kemampuan TV Android Philips sepenuhnya, Anda dapat sign in ke Google dengan Akun Google. Dengan sign in, Anda dapat bermain permainan favorit Anda di seluruh ponsel, tablet, dan TV. Anda juga akan mendapatkan rekomendasi video dan musik yang disesuaikan di layar utama TV serta akses ke Youtube, Google Play, dan aplikasi lainnya. Sign In Gunakan Akun Google yang sudah ada untuk sign in ke Google di TV. Akun Google terdiri dari alamat dan kata sandi. Jika Anda belum memiliki Akun Google, gunakan komputer atau tablet Anda untuk membuatnya (accounts.google.com). Untuk memainkan permainan dengan Google Play, Anda memerlukan profil Google+. Jika Anda tidak sign in selama pemasangan TV pertama kali, Anda dapat selalu masuk di lain waktu. Untuk sign in setelah Anda melakukan pemasangan TV Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android dan 3 - Tekan (turun) dan pilih Pribadi > Tambah akun dan 4 - Tekan OK pada SIGN IN. 5 - Dengan keyboard pada layar, masukkan alamat Anda dan 6 - Masuk kata sandi Anda dan tekan tombol OK kecil yang sama untuk sign in. 7 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Jika Anda ingin masuk dengan Akun Google yang lain, keluarlah terlebih dahulu, lalu masuklah dengan akun yang lain. 36

37 Play Movies & TV dan 3 - Pilih film atau tayangan TV dari pustaka Anda di aplikasi, pilih judul dan 4 - Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (hentikan), (jeda), (putar mundur) atau (maju cepat) pada remote control. 5 - Untuk menghentikan aplikasi Film & TV, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. 8 Aplikasi 8.1 Tentang Aplikasi Anda dapat menemukan semua aplikasi yang terinstal di bagian Aplikasi menu Awal. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Seperti aplikasi di smartphone atau tablet, aplikasi di TV Anda menawarkan fungsi khusus agar pengalaman menikmati TV makin lengkap. Aplikasi seperti YouTube, permainan, toko video, atau prakiraan cuaca (a.o.). Anda dapat menggunakan aplikasi Internet untuk menjelajahi Internet. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Musik Aplikasi bisa berasal dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips atau Google Play Store. Untuk membantu Anda memulai, beberapa aplikasi praktis telah diinstal sebelumnya di TV Anda. Dengan Google Play Music, Anda dapat memutar musik favorit Anda di TV. Dengan Google Play Music, Anda dapat membeli musik baru di komputer atau perangkat seluler Anda. Atau, di TV, Anda dapat mendaftar untuk Semua Akses, langganan Google Play Music. Atau, Anda dapat memutar musik yang sudah Anda miliki, yang tersimpan di komputer. Untuk menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips atau Google Play Store, TV harus tersambung ke Internet. Anda harus menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan untuk menggunakan aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi. Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google untuk menggunakan aplikasi Google Play dan Google Play Store. Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google Anda untuk berlangganan musik 8.2 Google Play Untuk memulai Google Play Music Movies and TV 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Movies dan 3 - Pilih musik yang Anda inginkan dan 4 - Untuk menghentikan aplikasi Musik, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. Dengan Google Play Movies & TV, Anda dapat menyewa atau membeli film dan tayangan TV untuk ditonton di TV. Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google untuk membeli film atau tayangan TV Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Untuk menyewa atau membeli film atau tayangan TV 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Movies & TV dan 3 - Pilih film atau tayangan TV dan 4 - Pilih pembelian yang Anda inginkan dan Anda akan dibawa ke prosedur pembelian. Permainan Dengan Google Play Games, Anda dapat bermain permainan di TV. Online atau offline. Untuk menonton film atau tayangan TV yang disewa atau dibeli Anda dapat melihat apa yang teman Anda mainkan saat ini atau Anda dapat bergabung di permainan dan berkompetisi. Anda dapat melacak pencapaian Anda atau memulai dari titik Anda keluar sebelumnya. 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet 37

38 Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google Anda untuk membeli permainan baru OK. 4 - Pilih tingkat kedewasaan yang Anda inginkan. 5 - Jika diminta, masukkan kode PIN. 6 - Untuk menutup aplikasi Google Play Store, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. Mulai aplikasi Google Play Games untuk memilih dan menginstal aplikasi permainan baru di TV Anda. Beberapa permainan tidak dikenai biaya. Pesan muncul jika permainan tertentu memerlukan gamepad untuk bermain permainan. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Untuk memulai dan menghentikan Google Play Game 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Games dan 3 - Pilih permainan yang akan dimainkan atau pilih permainan baru untuk diinstal dan 4 - Jika selesai, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT atau hentikan aplikasi dengan tombol keluar/henti khususnya. Pembayaran Untuk melakukan pembayaran pada Google Play di TV, Anda harus menambahkan formulir pembayaran kartu kredit (di luar Amerika Serikat) - ke Akun Google Anda. Saat Anda membeli film atau tayangan TV, Anda akan dikenai biaya pada kartu kredit ini. Untuk menambahkan kartu kredit Permainan yang Anda instal juga akan muncul di baris Permainan di menu Awal 1 - Di komputer Anda, kunjungi ke accounts.google.com dan sign in dengan Akun Google yang akan Anda gunakan dengan Google Play di TV. 2 - Kunjungi wallet.google.com untuk menambahkan kartu Akun Google Anda. 3 - Masukkan data kartu kredit dan terima syarat dan ketentuan. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv Google Play Store Dari Google Play Store, Anda dapat mengunduh dan menginstal aplikasi baru. Beberapa aplikasi tidak dikenai biaya. 8.3 Apa yang Anda Perlukan TV Anda harus tersambung dengan Internet Anda harus sign in dengan Akun Google di TV menambahkan kartu kredit ke Akun Google Anda untuk membeli aplikasi Sambungkan TV ke Internet untuk menikmati aplikasi yang dipilih oleh Philips. Aplikasi ini khusus dibuat untuk TV. Galeri Aplikasi Philips menawarkan berbagai aplikasi. Untuk beberapa negara, Anda dapat menginstal aplikasi Toko video lokal atau aplikasi dari stasiun penyiaran TV di negara Anda. Aplikasi yang disebut terakhir bisa menawarkan layanan Catch-Up TV. Mengunduh dan menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi tidak dikenai biaya. Galeri Aplikasi Untuk menginstal aplikasi baru 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Store dan 3 - Pilih aplikasi yang ingin Anda instal dan 4 - Untuk menutup aplikasi Google Play Store, tekan BACK berulang kali atau tekan EXIT. Koleksi Galeri Aplikasi Philips aplikasi mungkin berbeda pada setiap negara atau wilayah. Beberapa aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi telah diinstal sebelumnya pada TV Anda. Untuk menginstal aplikasi lainnya dari Galeri Aplikasi, Anda akan diminta untuk menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan. Anda dapat mengatur Pengaturan Privasi berdasarkan preferensi Anda. Kontrol orang tua Di Google Play Store, Anda dapat menyembunyikan aplikasi sesuai dengan kedewasaan pengguna/pembeli. Anda perlu memasukkan kode PIN untuk memilih atau mengubah tingkat kedewasaan. Untuk menginstal aplikasi dari Galeri Aplikasi Untuk mengatur kontrol orang tua 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Koleksi Philips > Galeri Aplikasi dan 3 - Pilih ikon aplikasi, lalu 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Google Play Store dan 3 - Pilih Pengaturan > Kontrol orang tua dan tekan 38

39 4 - Pilih Instal dan tekan 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Penguncian Anak Kunci Aplikasi dan 3 - Pilih Aktif dan tekan OK. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. OK. 8.4 Memulai atau Menghentikan Aplikasi Untuk informasi lainnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Penguncian Anak, Kunci Aplikasi untuk informasi selengkapnya. Anda dapat memulai aplikasi dari menu Awal. Untuk memulai aplikasi 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah ke Aplikasi dan pilih jenis aplikasi yang Anda inginkan dan 3 - Untuk menghentikan aplikasi, tekan BACK atau tekan EXIT atau hentikan aplikasi dengan tombol keluar/henti khususnya. Profil Terbatas Tentang Profil Terbatas Mengunci Aplikasi Anda dapat membatasi penggunaan aplikasi tertentu dengan mengalihkan TV ke profil terbatas. Menu Awal hanya akan menampilkan aplikasi yang Anda izinkan. Anda memerlukan kode PIN untuk keluar dari profil terbatas. Tentang Kunci Aplikasi Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda tidak dapat 8.5 Menemukan atau membuka aplikasi yang ditandai sebagai Tidak diizinkan Mengakses Google Play Store Membeli melalui Google Play Movies & TV, dan Google Play Games Menggunakan aplikasi pihak ketiga yang tidak menggunakan sign-in Google Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi yang tidak cocok untuk anak-anak. Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi atau menyiapkan profil terbatas di menu Awal. 18+ Kunci aplikasi 18+ akan meminta kode PIN saat Anda mencoba memulai aplikasi dengan rating 18+. Kunci ini hanya berlaku untuk aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda dapat Melihat konten yang sudah disewa atau dibeli dari Google Play Movies & TV Bermain permainan yang sudah dibeli dan dipasang dari Google Play Games Mengakses pengaturan berikut ini: Jaringan Wi-Fi, Ucapan dan Aksesibilitas Menambah aksesori Bluetooth Profil terbatas Anda dapat menyiapkan profil terbatas untuk menu Awal di mana yang tersedia hanyalah aplikasi yang Anda izinkan. Anda perlu memasukan kode PIN untuk menyiapkan dan mengaktifkan profil terbatas. Google Play Store - Kedewasaan Akun Google pada TV akan tetap log in. Penggunaan profil terbatas tidak mengubah Akun Google. Di Google Play Store, Anda dapat menyembunyikan aplikasi sesuai dengan kedewasaan pengguna/pembeli. Anda perlu memasukkan kode PIN untuk memilih atau mengubah tingkat kedewasaan. Tingkat kedewasaan akan menentukan aplikasi mana yang tersedia untuk diinstal. Penyiapan Untuk menyiapkan profil terbatas 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android, dan 3 - Tekan (turun) dan pilih Pribadi > Keamanan & batasan dan 4 - Pilih Profil Terbatas dan 5 - Pilih Pengaturan, dan 6 - Masukkan kode PIN dengan remote control. 7 - Pilih Aplikasi yang diizinkan, dan 8 - Pada daftar aplikasi yang tersedia, pilih salah Mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Pengaturan ini mengontrol pengaturan 18+ di Pengaturan Privasi Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Untuk mengunci aplikasi dengan rating

40 aplikasi dan tekan OK untuk mengizinkan atau tidak mengizinkan aplikasi ini. 9 - Tekan BACK untuk mundur satu langkah dan tekan EXIT untuk menutup menu. 8.7 Penyimpanan Anda dapat melihat seberapa banyak ruang penyimpanan - memori TV internal - yang Anda gunakan untuk aplikasi, video, musik Anda, dll. Anda dapat melihat berapa banyak ruang kosong yang masih tersedia untuk menginstal aplikasi baru. Periksa ruang penyimpanan jika aplikasi mulai terasa berjalan lambat atau jika aplikasi bermasalah. Sekarang, Anda dapat memasukkan profil terbatas. Dengan kode PIN, Anda selalu dapat mengubah kode PIN atau mengedit daftar aplikasi yang diizinkan atau yang tidak diizinkan. Untuk mengetahui seberapa banyak penyimpanan yang Anda gunakan Masuk Untuk masuk ke (beralih ke) profil terbatas 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android dan 3 - Pilih Perangkat > Penyimpanan & reset dan 4 - Lihat penggunaan ruang penyimpanan memori TV. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk mundur satu langkah dan tekan EXIT untuk menutup menu. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Android dan 3 - Tekan (turun) dan pilih Pribadi > Keamanan & batasan dan 4 - Pilih Masuk profil terbatas dan 5 - Masukkan kode PIN dengan remote control. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk mundur satu langkah dan tekan EXIT untuk menutup menu. Hard Drive USB Anda dapat melihat saat profil terbatas dimasukkan jika ikon muncul di layar Awal. Gulir ke bawah ke Pengaturan dan gulir ke kanan jauh. Jika Anda menyambungkan Hard Drive USB, Anda dapat menggunakan drive untuk memperbesar memori TV untuk menyimpan lebih banyak aplikasi. Izinkan Hard Drive USB untuk digunakan sebagai memori TV tambahan selama proses pemformatan. TV akan mencoba menyimpan aplikasi baru di Hard Drive USB terlebih dahulu. Beberapa aplikasi tidak mengizinkan untuk disimpan di Hard Drive USB. Keluar Untuk keluar dari profil terbatas 1 - Tekan HOME, gulir ke bawah ke Pengaturan dan gulir ke kanan jauh. 2 - Pilih Profil Terbatas dan 3 - Pilih Keluar dari profil terbatas dan 4 - Masukkan kode PIN. TV akan keluar dari profil terbatas. Untuk memigrasi data Anda yang sudah ada, buka Semua Pengaturan > Pengaturan Android > Prgkt> Penyimpanan & atur ulang lalu pilih Hard Drive USB. 8.6 Mengelola Aplikasi Jika Anda menghentikan aplikasi dan kembali ke menu Awal, aplikasi tidak benar-benar berhenti. Aplikasi masih berjalan di latar belakang agar siap sedia saat Anda memulainya lagi. Agar berjalan dengan lancar, kebanyakan aplikasi perlu menyimpan beberapa data di memori cache TV. Mungkin sebaiknya hentikan aplikasi sepenuhnya atau bersihkan data cache aplikasi tertentu guna mengoptimalkan keseluruhan kinerja aplikasi dan agar penggunaan memori tetap rendah di TV Android Anda. Selain itu, menghapus instalan aplikasi yang tidak Anda gunakan lagi adalah tindakan terbaik. 40

41 9 Internet 9.1 Memulai Internet Anda bisa menelusuri Internet di TV Anda. Anda dapat menampilkan semua situs web di Internet, tetapi kebanyakan situs tersebut tidak disiapkan untuk layar TV. Beberapa plug-in (misalnya untuk menampilkan halaman atau video) tidak tersedia pada TV Anda. Anda tidak bisa mengirimkan atau mengunduh file. Halaman Internet ditampilkan satu per satu dalam layar penuh. Untuk memulai browser Internet 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Gulir ke bawah dan pilih Aplikasi > Internet dan 3 - Masukkan alamat Internet dan pilih, 4 - Untuk menutup Internet, tekan HOME atau EXIT. 9.2 Opsi tentang Internet Beberapa ekstra tersedia untuk Internet. Untuk membuka ekstra 1 - Saat situs web dibuka, tekan OPTIONS. 2 - Pilih salah satu item dan Tambahkan panggilan cepat: Untuk memasukkan alamat Internet baru. Tambahkan ke penanda: Tambahkan halaman sebagai penanda Keamanan halaman: Untuk melihat tingkat keamanan halaman saat ini. Tab pribadi baru: Buka tab pribadi baru, dan lakukan penelusuran pribadi Pengaturan: Pengaturan untuk Zoom, Ukuran teks, Mode aksesibilitas, Selalu tampilkan bilah menu, dan hapus riwayat (penelusuran) Bantuan: Informasi browser Internet Keluar dari browser Internet: Tutup browser Internet 41

42 10 Menu TV 10.1 Tentang Menu TV Jika TV tidak dapat tersambung dengan Internet, Anda dapat menggunakan Menu TV sebagai menu Awal Anda. Di Menu TV, Anda akan menemukan setiap fungsi TV Membuka Menu TV Untuk membuka menu TV dan membuka item 1 - Tekan untuk membuka Menu TV. 2 - Pilih item dan tekan OK untuk membuka atau memulainya. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu TV tanpa memulai apa pun. 42

43 Buka opsi ini untuk melihat informasi tentang perangkat yang tersambung. 11 Sumber Nama dan Jenis Perangkat Beralih ke perangkat Saat Anda menyambungkan perangkat baru ke TV dan TV mendeteksi perangkat, Anda dapat menetapkan ikon yang sesuai dengan jenis perangkat. Jika Anda menyambungkan perangkat dengan kabel HDMI dan HDMI CEC, TV mendeteksi jenis perangkat secara otomatis dan perangkat diberi ikon yang sesuai. Dari daftar Sumber, Anda dapat beralih ke setiap perangkat yang tersambung. Anda dapat beralih ke tuner untuk menonton TV, membuka konten Flash Drive USB yang tersambung atau melihat rekaman yang Anda buat di Hard Drive USB yang tersambung. Anda dapat beralih ke perangkat Anda yang tersambung untuk menonton programnya, penerima digital atau pemutar Disk Blu-ray. Jenis perangkat menentukan gaya gambar dan suara, nilai resolusi, pengaturan tertentu atau posisi dalam menu Sumber. Anda tidak perlu khawatir tentang pengaturan yang ideal. Untuk beralih ke perangkat yang tersambung 1 - Tekan SOURCES untuk membuka menu Sumber. 2 - Pilih salah satu item di daftar sumber dan TV akan menampilkan program atau konten perangkat. 3 - Tekan SOURCES lagi untuk menutup menu. Mengubah Nama atau Mengubah Jenis Anda dapat selalu mengubah nama atau mengubah jenis perangkat yang tersambung. Cari ikon di sebelah kanan nama perangkat di menu Sumber. Beberapa sumber input TV tidak mengizinkan pengubahan nama. Putar Sekali-Sentuh Dengan TV dalam kondisi siaga, Anda dapat menyalakan pemutar disk dengan remote control TV Anda. Untuk menyalakan pemutar disk dan TV dari kondisi siaga dan segera mulai memutar disk, tekan (putar) pada remote control TV. Perangkat harus disambungkan dengan kabel HDMI dan TV serta perangkat harus dilengkapi HDMI CEC yang diaktifkan. Untuk mengubah jenis perangkat 1 - Pilih perangkat di menu Sumber. 2 - Tekan (kanan) untuk memilih ikon dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menyembunyikan keyboard pada layar. 4 - Tekan (turun) untuk menemukan semua jenis perangkat yang tersedia. Pilih jenis yang Anda inginkan dan Jika Anda ingin mereset jenis perangkat ke jenis konektor aslinya, pilih Reset dan 6 - Pilih Tutup dan tekan OK untuk menutup menu ini. Opsi untuk Input TV Beberapa perangkat input TV menawarkan pengaturan tertentu. Untuk mengubah nama perangkat Untuk mengatur opsi untuk input TV tertentu 1 - Pilih perangkat di menu Sumber. 2 - Tekan (kanan) untuk memilih ikon dan 3 - Gunakan Keyboard pada layar untuk menghapus nama saat ini dan memasukkan nama baru. Tekan untuk mengonfirmasi. 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menyembunyikan keyboard pada layar. 5 - Jika Anda ingin mereset nama perangkat ke nama konektor aslinya, pilih Reset dan 6 - Pilih Tutup dan tekan OK untuk menutup menu ini. 1 - Tekan SOURCES. 2 - Pilih input TV di daftar dan 3 - Tekan OPTIONS. Anda dapat mengatur opsi untuk input TV yang dipilih di sini. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS lagi untuk menutup menu Opsi. Opsi yang memungkinkan Kontrol Dengan opsi ini, Anda dapat mengoperasikan perangkat yang tersambung dengan remote control TV. Perangkat harus disambungkan dengan kabel HDMI dan TV serta perangkat harus dilengkapi HDMI CEC yang diaktifkan. Info Perangkat 43

44 11.4 Memindai Ulang Sambungan Anda dapat memindai kembali semua sambungan TV untuk memperbarui menu Sumber dengan perangkat yang baru saja tersambung. Untuk memindai kembali sambungan 1 - Tekan SOURCES untuk membuka menu Sumber. 2 - Tekan (naik) untuk memilih ikon di kanan atas menu Sumber. 3 - Tekan OK untuk mulai memindai sambungan. Perangkat yang baru disambungkan akan ditambahkan ke menu Sumber. 44

45 12 Jaringan 12.1 Jaringan Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Jaringan, untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang menyambungkan TV ke jaringan Bluetooth Memasangkan Perangkat Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Bluetooth, Pemasangan untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang memasangkan perangkat nirkabel. Menghapus Perangkat Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci dan cari Bluetooth, Hapus perangkat untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memutus pemasangan (menghapus) perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel. Bluetooth Aktif atau Tidak Aktif Untuk menyambungkan perangkat Bluetooth nirkabel, pastikan Bluetooth diaktifkan. Untuk mengaktifkan Bluetooth 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Nirkabel dan Jaringan dan 3 - Pilih Bluetooth > Bluetooth Aktif/Tidak Aktif dan 4 - Pilih Aktif atau Tidak Aktif dan 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. 45

46 13 Warna, Kontras, Ketajaman, Kecerahan Pengaturan Menyesuaikan warna gambar 13.1 (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Warna. Gambar Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai saturasi warna gambar. Pengaturan Gambar Gaya Gambar Menyesuaikan kontras gambar Memilih gaya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Kontras. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Gaya gambar. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai kontras gambar. Untuk memudahkan penyesuaian gambar, Anda dapat memilih preset gaya gambar. Anda dapat menurunkan nilai kontras untuk mengurangi konsumsi daya. Pribadi - Preferensi gambar yang Anda atur selama penyalaan pertama. Tajam - Ideal untuk tampilan siang hari Alami - Pengaturan gambar alami Standar - Pengaturan yang paling hemat energi - Pengaturan pabrik Film - Ideal untuk menonton film Permainan - Ideal untuk memainkan permainan Siang - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Malam - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Menyesuaikan ketajaman gambar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Ketajaman. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai ketajaman gambar. Menyesuaikan kecerahan Ketika TV menerima sinyal HDR, pilih gaya gambar berikut: (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Kecerahan. HDR Pribadi HDR Tajam HDR Alami HDR Film HDR Permainan Siang - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Malam - Untuk Kalibrasi ISF Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur tingkat kecerahan sinyal gambar. Catatan: Pengaturan kecerahan jauh melampaui nilai referensi (50) dapat menyebabkan kontras yang lebih rendah. Mengembalikan Gaya 1 - Pilih gaya gambar yang ingin Anda kembalikan. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Kmblkn gaya, dan Gaya dikembalikan. Pengaturan Gambar Lanjutan Pengaturan Komputer (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Komputer Menyesuaikan Gaya Setiap gambar yang Anda sesuaikan, seperti Warna atau Kontras, akan disimpan di dalam Gaya Gambar yang saat ini dipilih. Ini memungkinkan Anda menyesuaikan setiap gaya. Hanya gaya Pribadi yang dapat menyimpan pengaturannya untuk setiap sumber yang tersambung dalam menu Sumber.. Atur ke Aktif untuk mendapatkan pengaturan gambar ideal untuk menggunakan TV Anda sebagai monitor komputer. Pengaturan Warna Pengaturan Warna Lanjutan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna. 46

47 Menyesuaikan penyempurnaan warna Kontrol warna (Rona, Saturasi) (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Pe nyempurnaan warna. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Kontrol warna. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mengatur tingkat intensitas warna dan detail dalam warna-warna terang. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai Rona atau Saturasi, atau pilih Atur ulang semua untuk mengatur ulang semua nilai ke default. Memilih suhu warna preset Mode RGB Saja (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Suhu warna. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Mo de RGB Saja. Pilih Normal, Hangat, atau Dingin untuk mengatur suhu warna berdasarkan preferensi Anda. Pilih Merah, Hijau, atau Biru untuk mengubah gambar menjadi warna saja, atau pilih Tidak aktif untuk menonaktifkan mode RGB. Menyesuaikan suhu warna (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Warna > Suhu warna kustom. Pengaturan Kontras Lanjutan Mode Kontras Pilih Kustom di menu Suhu warna untuk menyesuaikan suhu warna sendiri. Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. WP adalah titik putih dan BL adalah tingkat hitam. Anda juga dapat memilih salah satu preset di menu ini. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > M ode Kontras. Pilih Normal, Dioptimalkan untuk gambar, atau Dioptimalkan untuk menghemat daya untuk mengatur agar TV otomatis menurunkan kontras, demi konsumsi daya terbaik atau pengalaman gambar terbaik. Pengaturan Warna ISF Tentang ISF Maksimalkan tampilan TV Anda dengan Kalibrasi ISF. Mintalah ahli kalibrasi ISF untuk datang ke rumah dan mengatur TV ke pengaturan gambar paling optimal. Minta dealer Anda untuk melakukan Kalibrasi ISF. Pengaturan HDR Jika sedang menyaksikan program HDR - program yang direkam dalam HDR - Anda tidak perlu lagi meningkatkan ke HDR dan pengaturan HDR tidak tersedia. TV dapat memutar program HDR dari koneksi HDMI, dari sumber Internet, atau dari perangkat USB yang terhubung. Manfaat kalibrasi adalah gambar yang lebih jernih dan tajam detail yang lebih baik di bagian terang dan gelap hitam yang lebih dalam dan lebih pekat kemurnian dan kualitas warna lebih baik mengoptimalkan efek tampilan gambar di menu awal Anda untuk kondisi siang dan malam hari Jika Anda menonton program HDR (High-Dynamic Range) - program yang direkam di HDR - TV akan secara otomatis diubah ke mode HDR dengan indikasi. Ahli Kalibrasi ISF menyimpan dan mengunci pengaturan ISF sebagai dua gaya gambar. Ketika Kalibrasi ISF selesai, tekan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Gaya Gambar > Siang atau Malam. Pilih Siang untuk menonton TV selama kondisi cahaya terang atau pilih Malam saat gelap. Kontrol Peningkatan HDR tidak tersedia. TV dapat memutar program HDR dari koneksi HDMI 1 atau HDMI 2, siaran, dari sumber Internet, atau dari perangkat memori USB yang tersambung. Hanya HDR10 dan Hybrid Log Gamma HDR yang didukung 47

48 Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > G amma. Peningkatan HDR Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk melakukan pengaturan non-linier bagi luminansi dan kontras gambar. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > P eningkatan HDR. Pilih Aktif untuk meningkatkan kecerahan dan kontras gambar. Gambar jadi lebih cerah dan memiliki tingkat kontras lebih tinggi antara bagian yang lebih terang dan lebih gelap. Peningkatan HDR menjaga warna tetap kaya dan tersaturasi. Resolusi Ultra (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Ketajaman > Resolusi Ultra. Catatan: Pilih Aktif untuk mendapatkan ketajaman superior dalam tepi garis dan detail. Tersedia ketika sinyal SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) terdeteksi. Tidak tersedia ketika konten video didukung HDR. Pembersihan Gambar HDR Sempurna Reduksi noise (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > H DR Sempurna. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Pembersihan gambar > Reduksi noise. Pilih HDR Sempurna untuk efek kontras dan kecerahan yang superior. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mengatur tingkatan penghapusan noise dalam konten video. Noise biasanya terlihat sebagai titik-titik kecil yang bergerak dalam gambar di layar. Catatan: Tersedia ketika sinyal HDR (High Dynamic Range) terdeteksi. Kontras Sempurna Pengurang Artefak MPEG (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > K ontras sempurna. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Pembersihan gambar > Pengurang Artefak MPEG. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mengatur tingkat penyempurnaan detail TV secara otomatis di area gelap, sedang, dan terang pada gambar. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mendapatkan tingkat penghalusan artefak yang berbeda dalam konten video digital. Artefak MPEG biasanya terlihat sebagai balok kecil atau tepi bergerigi pada gambar di layar. Kontras Video, Gamma Kontras video Pengaturan Gambar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Kontras > K ontras video. Gaya Gambar Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau mengatur tingkat kontras video. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Gambar > G aya gambar. (turun) untuk Gaya gambar menyediakan mode pengaturan gambar yang dioptimalkan untuk konten video berbeda. Gamma Pilih salah satu gaya gambar untuk mendapatkan pengalaman tampilan yang lebih baik. (Film, (Menu TV) > 48

49 Olahraga, Standar, Halus, Pribadi) 2 - Pilih Gambar dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Lanjutan > Menghapus residu gambar. 4 - Pilih Konfirmasikan. Tidak tersedia untuk hal berikut: (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Komputer diatur ke Aktif. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Gaya gambar > Permainan. TV akan dimatikan hingga proses selesai. Jika Anda sedang merekam sesuatu, proses akan dijeda, dan dimulai ulang hingga perekaman selesai. Ini mungkin memerlukan waktu lebih dari 1 jam. Jika Anda menghidupkan TV selama proses tersebut, maka proses akan dihentikan dan akan dimulai ulang secara otomatis saat TV beralih ke keadaan siaga di lain waktu. Selama memproses, garis putih mungkin muncul di layar. Hal ini normal saat menghapus retensi gambar pada layar. Gambar Alami (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Gambar > N atural Motion. Natural Motion membuat gerakan menjadi mulus dan lancar. Format Gambar Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mendapatkan tingkat pengurangan getaran gambar, yang terlihat dalam film di TV. Pilih Minimum atau Tidak aktif ketika noise tampak saat memutar gambar bergerak di layar. Jika gambar tidak ditampilkan penuh pada layar, jika ada bilah hitam di atas atau bawah atau di kedua sisi, Anda dapat menyesuaikan gambar untuk ditampilkan penuh pada layar. Untuk memilih salah satu pengaturan dasar untuk mengisi layar Catatan: Hanya tersedia ketika Gaya gambar diatur ke Pribadi. Catatan: Hanya tersedia ketika Gaya gambar diatur ke Pribadi. 1 - Saat menonton saluran TV, tekan. 2 - Pilih Format Gambar > Isi Layar, Disesuaikan Dengan Layar, Layar Lebar dan Asli, dan 3 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Isi Layar secara otomatis memperbesar gambar untuk mengisi layar. Distorsi gambar minimal, terjemahan tetap terlihat. Tidak sesuai untuk input PC. Beberapa format gambar ekstrem dapat tetap menampilkan bilah hitam. Disesuaikan dengan Layar secara otomatis memperbesar gambar untuk mengisi layar tanpa distorsi. Bilah hitam mungkin terlihat. Tidak sesuai untuk input PC. Layar Lebar secara otomatis memperbesar layar ke layar lebar. Asli secara otomatis memperbesar layar ke layar lebar. Hanya untuk seri 7502/8102/8602/9002 Untuk memformat gambar secara manual Perfect Clear Motion (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Gambar > Lanjutan > Gambar > P erfect Clear Motion. Perfect Clear Motion membuat gerakan menjadi halus dan lancar. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum untuk mendapatkan tingkat pengurangan getaran gambar, yang terlihat dalam film di TV. Pilih Minimum atau Tidak aktif ketika noise tampak saat memutar gambar bergerak di layar. 1 - Saat menonton saluran TV, tekan. 2 - Pilih Lanjutan dan 3 - Gunakan Geser, Zoom atau Regangkan untuk menyesuaikan gambar. 4 - Atau pilih Urungkan untuk kembali ke pengaturan untuk gambar saat Anda membuka Format Gambar. Geser Klik tanda panah untuk menggeser gambar. Anda hanya dapat menggeser gambar saat sedang diperbesar. Zoom Klik tanda panah untuk memperbesar. Regangkan Klik tanda panah untuk meregangkan Menghapus residu gambar Menampilkan gambar diam dalam waktu yang lama dapat menyebabkan bekas gambar. Fenomena ini adalah hal yang normal untuk panel OLED. Hindari menampilkan gambar diam pada layar TV dalam waktu yang lama. Atau Anda dapat menghapus retensi gambar pada layar tersebut dengan mengaktifkan fungsi ini. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 49

50 gambar secara vertikal atau horizontal. Urungkan Klik untuk kembali ke format gambar sebelumnya. Bas, Treble, Volume Headphone, Suara Surround Bas (Menu TV) > Pengaturan Gambar Cepat Pengaturan > Suara > Bas. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan tingkat nada rendah pada suara. Saat penginstalan pertama, Anda melakukan beberapa pengaturan gambar dalam beberapa langkah mudah. Anda dapat mengulangi langkahlangkah ini dengan Pengaturan Gambar Cepat. Untuk melakukan langkah ini, pastikan TV dapat menyetel saluran TV atau menampilkan program dari perangkat yang tersambung. Treble (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Treble. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan tingkat nada tinggi pada suara. Untuk menetapkan gambar dalam beberapa langkah mudah 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Gambar dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Pengaturan Gambar Cepat lalu 4 - Gunakan tombol navigasi untuk memilih pilihan Anda. 5 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Volume headphone (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Volume headphone. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan volume headphone yang tersambung secara terpisah. Mengaktifkan efek suara surround 13.2 (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Suara surround > Aktif. Suara Gaya Suara Pengaturan Suara Lanjutan Memilih gaya (Menu TV) > suara. Kontrol Volume Pengaturan > Suara > Gaya Penyesuaian volume otomatis Untuk memudahkan penyesuaian suara, Anda dapat memilih pengaturan preset dengan gaya suara. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Penyesuaian volume otomatis. Pribadi - Preferensi suara yang Anda atur saat pertama kali menyalakan. Asli - Pengaturan suara paling netral Film - Ideal untuk menonton film Musik - Ideal untuk mendengarkan musik Permainan - Ideal untuk permainan Berita - Ideal untuk percakapan Pilih Aktif untuk langsung secara otomatis menyamakan perbedaan volume. Biasanya ketika Anda beralih saluran. Volume delta (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Volume delta. Mengembalikan Gaya 1 - Pilih gaya suara yang ingin Anda kembalikan. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Kmblkn gaya, dan Gaya dikembalikan. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai delta untuk volume speaker TV. 50

51 dinonaktifkan saat streaming konten Dolby Digital Plus. Pengaturan Audio Out (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Audio out. Pelevelan output digital (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Pelevelan output digital. Atur TV untuk memutar suara di TV atau di sistem audio yang tersambung. Anda dapat memilih di mana Anda ingin mendengarkan suara TV dan bagaimana Anda ingin mengontrolnya. Jika memilih Speaker TV Tidak Aktif, Anda menonaktifkan speaker TV secara permanen. Jika Anda memilih Speaker TV, speaker TV selalu aktif. Sesuaikan tingkat kekencangan suara dari perangkat yang tersambung ke output audio digital (SPDIF) atau HDMI. Pilih Tambah untuk membesarkan volume. Pilih Kurang untuk mengecilkan suara. Dengan perangkat audio yang terhubung ke HDMI CEC, pilih sistem suara HDMI. TV akan menonaktifkan speaker TV ketika perangkat memutar suara. Penundaan output digital (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Penundaan output digital. Clear Dialogue (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Hapus dialog. Untuk beberapa Sistem Home Theatre, Anda mungkin perlu menyesuaikan penundaan sinkronisasi audio untuk menyinkronkan audio ke video. Pilih Tidak aktif jika penundaan suara diatur pada Suara. Pilih Aktif untuk memperbaiki suara saat berpidato. Ideal untuk program berita. Offset output digital (Hanya tersedia ketika Penundaan output digital diatur ke Aktif) (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Offset output digital. Pengaturan Output Digital Pengaturan output digital tersedia untuk sinyal suara HDMI ARC dan optik. Jika Anda tidak dapat mengatur penundaan pada Sistem Home Theatre, Anda dapat mengatur TV untuk menyinkronkan suara. Anda dapat mengatur offset yang mengompensasi waktu yang diperlukan Sistem Home Theatre untuk memproses suara gambar TV. Anda dapat mengatur nilai dalam kelipatan 5 mdtk. Pengaturan maksimumnya adalah 60 mdtk. Format output digital (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Lanjutan > Format output digital. Atur sinyal audio out TV agar sesuai dengan kemampuan suara dari Sistem Home Theatre yang tersambung. Stereo: Jika perangkat pemutaran audio tidak memiliki pemrosesan suara multisaluran, pilih hanya output konten stereo ke perangkat pemutaran audio Anda. Multisaluran: Pilih hanya output konten audio 5.1 (sinyal suara multisaluran terkompresi) ke perangkat pemutaran audio Anda. Multisaluran (bypass): Pilih untuk output konten Dolby Digital Plus atau DTS ke perangkat pemutaran audio Anda atau sistem Home theatre. Penempatan TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Suara > Penempatan TV. Pilih Di dudukan TV atau Di Dinding untuk mendapatkan reproduksi suara terbaik sesuai pengaturan. - Pastikan perangkat pemutaran audio Anda mendukung fitur Dolby Atmos. - Output SPDIF (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT) akan 51

52 13.3 Ikuti Warna Pengaturan Ambilight (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti warna. Aktifkan atau Nonaktifkan Ambilight Pilih salah satu gaya warna preset. Menonaktifkan Ambilight Lahar panas - Variasi warna merah Kedalaman air - Variasi warna biru Alam segar - Variasi warna hijau putih hangat - Warna statis Putih dingin - Warna statis Tekan AMBILIGHT dan pilih Tidak aktif, atau Anda dapat menonaktifkan dengan menekan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Tidak aktif. Ikuti Aplikasi Gaya Ambilight (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti aplikasi. Anda dapat memilih bagaimana Ambilight mengikutinya. Fungsi ini tersedia bila Anda mengontrol Ambilight menggunakan aplikasi. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight. Kecerahan Ambilight, Saturasi Ikuti Video Kecerahan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti video. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Kecerahan. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur tingkat kecerahan Ambilight. Pilih salah satu gaya yang mengikuti dinamika gambar di layar TV. Standar - Ideal untuk menonton TV sehari-hari Alami - Mengikuti gambar atau suara senyata mungkin Imersif - Ideal untuk film laga Tajam - Ideal untuk kondisi siang hari Permainan - Ideal untuk permainan Nyaman - Ideal untuk malam hari yang sunyi Santai - Ideal untuk nuansa ruang santai Saturasi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Saturasi. Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur tingkat saturasi Ambilight. Ambilight + Hue Ikuti Audio (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Gaya Ambilight > Ikuti audio. Mengonfigurasi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Konfigurasi. Pilih salah satu gaya yang mengikuti dinamika suara. Lumina - Mencampur dinamika audio dengan warna video Warna-warni - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Retro - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Spektrum - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Pemindai - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Irama - Didasarkan pada dinamika audio Party - Campuran semua gaya Ikuti Audio, satu per satu Mematikan Menonaktifkan Ambilight+hue (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Nonaktifkan. 52

53 TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Lanjutan > Imersif (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Imersif. Penyetelan ISF. Mengatur Ambilight agar langsung mati atau Tekan tanda panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan seberapa akurat bola lampu Rona mengikuti warna Ambilight. perlahan mati saat Anda mematikan TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Lanjutan > TV mati. Light+hue Ruang Santai Jika Anda memasang Ambilight+hue, Anda dapat membuat bola lampu rona mengikuti Cahaya Lounge dari Ambilight. Lampu rona Philips akan memperluas efek Cahaya Lounge di seluruh ruangan Pengaturan Ekonomis Menyalakan/mematikan bola lampu hue Mengatur tingkat hemat daya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Light+hue ruang santai. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Hemat daya. Pilih Maksimum, Medium, atau Minimum agar mendapatkan tingkat hemat daya berbeda, atau pilih Tidak aktif untuk menonaktifkan mode hemat daya. Lihat Konfigurasi atau Atur Ulang Melihat pengaturan saat ini dari Ambilight+hue, Mengatur layar tidak aktif agar hemat daya jaringan, Bridge, dan bola lampu (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Layar tidak aktif. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Lihat konfigurasi. Pilih Layar tidak aktif, layar TV dinonaktifkan, untuk mengaktifkan kembali layar TV, tekan tombol apa pun pada remote control. Mengatur ulang pengaturan Ambilight+hue saat ini Mengaktifkan sensor cahaya sekitar bawaan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Atur ulang konfigurasi. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Sensor cahaya. Pilih Sensor cahaya, sensor bawaan untuk cahaya sekitar akan menurunkan kecerahan layar TV ketika cahaya sekitar menjadi gelap. Sensor cahaya bawaan secara otomatis menyesuaikan gambar sesuai dengan kondisi pencahayaan ruangan. Pengaturan Ambilight Lanjutan Menetralkan pengaruh warna pada warna Mengatur pengatur waktu mati TV Ambilight (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan ekonomis > Pengatur waktu mati. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Ambilight > Lanjutan > Warna dinding. Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. Nilai 0 (Tidak aktif) menonaktifkan fitur mati otomatis. Pilih warna dinding di belakang TV dan TV akan mengubah warna Ambilight agar tampak seperti yang diinginkan. Pilih Pengatur waktu mati, TV akan mati secara otomatis untuk menghemat daya. TV akan mati jika menerima sinyal TV tapi Anda tidak menekan tombol remote control selama 4 jam. Penyetelan ISF TV akan mati jika tidak menerima sinyal TV atau (Menu 53

54 tidak ada perintah dari remote control selama 10 menit. 4:2:0, UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2. Pengaturan UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2 memungkinkan sinyal UHD YCbCr 4:4:4 / 4:2:2. Pengaturan UHD 4:2:0 memungkinkan sinyal UHD YCbCr 4:2:0. Jika Anda menggunakan TV sebagai monitor atau menggunakan penerima digital untuk menonton TV (Set-Top Box - STB) dan Anda tidak menggunakan remote control TV, sebaiknya nonaktifkan fitur mati otomatis ini, dengan mengatur nilainya ke 0. Jika perangkat tidak menggunakan sinyal Ultra HD, Anda dapat mematikan Ultra HD untuk sambungan HDMI ini Mengatur kualitas sinyal untuk setiap konektor Pengaturan Umum HDMI (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan Umum > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD Tidak Aktif. EasyLink - HDMI CEC Sambungkan perangkat yang kompatibel dengan HDMI CEC ke TV, Anda dapat mengoperasikannya dengan remote control TV. EasyLink HDMI CEC harus diaktifkan pada TV dan perangkat yang tersambung. Hard Drive USB Mengaktifkan EasyLink Anda perlu mengatur dan memformat Hard Drive USB sebelum merekam saluran. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > EasyLink > Aktif. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Hard Drive USB. Sebelum Anda dapat menjeda atau merekam siaran, Anda harus menyambungkan dan memformat Hard Drive USB. Memformat akan menghapus semua file dari Hard Drive USB. Jika Anda ingin merekam siaran dengan data Panduan TV dari Internet, Anda harus mengonfigurasi sambungan Internet terlebih dahulu sebelum memasang Hard Drive USB. Mengoperasikan perangkat yang kompatibel HDMI CEC dengan remote control TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > EasyLink > Remote control EasyLink > Aktif. Peringatan Catatan: Hard Drive USB diformat secara eksklusif untuk TV ini, sehingga Anda tidak dapat menggunakan rekaman yang disimpan pada TV atau PC lainnya. Jangan menyalin atau mengubah file di Hard Drive USB dengan aplikasi PC apa pun. Hal ini akan merusak rekaman Anda. Jika Anda memformat Hard Drive USB lainnya, konten pada Hard Drive USB sebelumnya akan hilang. Hard Drive USB yang terpasang di TV Anda akan perlu diformat ulang untuk digunakan dengan komputer. EasyLink mungkin tidak berfungsi pada perangkat dari merek lain. Fungsionalitas HDMI CEC memiliki nama yang berbeda pada merek yang berbeda. Beberapa contohnya adalah: Anynet, Aquos Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink dan Viera Link. Tidak semua merek sepenuhnya kompatibel dengan EasyLink. Contoh nama merek HDMI CEC adalah properti masing-masing pemiliknya. Untuk memformat Hard Drive USB HDMI Ultra HD 1 - Sambungkan Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV. Jangan menyambungkan perangkat USB lainnya ke port USB lain saat memformat. 2 - Hidupkan Hard Drive USB dan TV. 3 - Pilih Rekaman jika Anda ingin melakukan Jeda TV dan Rekaman, jika tidak, pilih Aplikasi untuk menyimpan aplikasi. Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. 4 - Semua file dan data akan dihapus setelah memformat. 5 - Saat Hard Drive USB diformat, biarkan Hard Drive USB tersambung secara permanen. Sambungkan perangkat HDMI dan jalankan sinyal Ultra HD di TV Anda, mungkin tidak bekerja dengan baik atau menampilkan gambar atau suara yang terdistorsi. Untuk menghindari kerusakan perangkat semacam ini, Anda dapat menetapkan sinyal ke level yang dapat ditangani oleh perangkat. Mengatur kualitas sinyal untuk setiap konektor HDMI (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan Umum > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD 54

55 Pengaturan Keyboard USB Panduan TV Mengatur tata letak keyboard untuk keyboard USB Panduan TV menerima informasi (data) dari stasiun penyiaran atau dari Internet. TV bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang diinstal di TV. yang dipasang (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Pengaturan keyb. USB. Memilih asal penerimaan sumber data panduan TV Sambungkan keyboard USB ke salah satu sambungan USB pada TV ini. Jika TV mendeteksi keyboard untuk pertama kali, Anda dapat memilih tata letak keyboard Anda dan menguji pemilihan Anda. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Panduan TV. Catatan: Di beberapa wilayah dan untuk beberapa saluran, informasi panduan TV mungkin tidak tersedia. TV tidak bisa mengumpulkan informasi panduan TV dari saluran yang dilihat dari penerima atau dekoder digital. Nama Profil CAM Mengatur nama profil untuk CI+/CAM yang terpasang (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Nama profil CAM. Logo Saluran Menonaktifkan logo saluran Pengaturan HbbTV - Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan Umum > Lanjutan > Logo saluran. Mengaktifkan HbbTV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > HbbTV > Aktif. Atur ulang Pengaturan TV dan Pasang ulang TV Menonaktifkan Pelacakan Riwayat HbbTV Mengatur ulang semua nilai pengaturan ke (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > Pelacakan HbbTV > Tidak aktif. pengaturan TV asli (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Pengaturan pabrik. Menghapus Cookie HbbTV (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Lanjutan > Pengaturan HbbTV > Cookie HbbTV > Aktif. Mengulang penginstalan TV lengkap, dan mengatur kembali status TV ke saat pertama kali Anda menghidupkannya (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Instal ulang TV. Rumah atau Toko Masukkan kode PIN dan pilih Ya, TV akan diinstal ulang sepenuhnya. Memilih lokasi TV Anda (Menu TV) > umum > Lokasi. Semua pengaturan akan direset dan saluran yang diinstal akan diganti. Pengaturan > Pengaturan Penginstalan ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit Pilih Toko, gaya gambar dikembalikan ke Tajam, dan dapat menyetel pengaturan toko. Mode toko adalah untuk promosi di toko. Menyesuaikan pengaturan toko (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Pengaturan umum > Pengaturan toko. 55

56 Pengaturan standar untuk jam TV adalah Otomatis. Informasi waktu berasal dari informasi UTC - Waktu Universal Terkoordinasi yang disiarkan. Jika jamnya tidak tepat, Anda dapat mengatur jam TV ke Tergantung negara Pengaturan Jam, Wilayah, dan Bahasa Bahasa Mengoreksi jam secara manual (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Mode jam otomatis > Manual. Mengubah bahasa menu TV dan pesan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Tanggal, Waktu. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Bahasa menu. Kunjungi menu sebelumnya, dan pilih Tanggal dan Waktu untuk menyesuaikan nilainya. Catatan: Jika tidak ada pengaturan otomatis yang menampilkan waktu secara tepat, Anda dapat mengatur waktu secara manual. Jika Anda menjadwalkan rekaman dari Panduan TV, sebaiknya Anda tidak mengubah waktu dan tanggal secara manual. Mengatur bahasa preferensi audio (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Audio primer, Audio sekunder. Saluran TV Digital dapat menyiarkan audio dengan beberapa bahasa yang diucapkan untuk program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa audio primer dan sekunder yang Anda pilih. Jika audio pada salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan beralih ke audio ini. Mengatur zona waktu atau mengatur offset waktu untuk wilayah Anda (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Zona waktu. Mengatur bahasa preferensi terjemahan (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Terjemahan primer, Terjemahan sekunder. Mengatur TV untuk beralih ke siaga secara otomatis setelah waktu preset Saluran digital dapat menawarkan beberapa bahasa terjemahan untuk sebuah program. Anda dapat menetapkan bahasa terjemahan primer dan sekunder pilihan Anda. Jika terjemahan di salah satu bahasa ini tersedia, TV akan menampilkan terjemahan yang Anda pilih. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Timer Tidur. Keyboard Remote Control Mengatur bahasa preferensi teleteks (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Region dan bahasa > Keyboard remote control (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Bahasa > Teks primer, Teks sekunder. Untuk mengatur tata letak keyboard ke Azerty. Beberapa stasiun penyiaran TV digital menyediakan beberapa bahasa Teks Pengaturan Android Jam (Menu TV) > bahasa > Jam. (Menu TV) > Android. Pengaturan > Wilayah dan Pengaturan > Pengaturan Melihat daftar Aplikasi yang terinstal, periksa ruang kosong untuk mengunduh aplikasi lainnya atau hapus instalasi Aplikasi. Mengoreksi jam secara otomatis (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Wilayah dan bahasa > Jam > Mode jam otomatis. 56

57 13.8 Tetapkan Kode dan Ubah Kode Pengaturan Akses Universal (Menu TV) > Mengatur kode baru atau mengatur ulang ubah Pengaturan > Akses universal. kode Saat Akses Universal diaktifkan, TV akan disiapkan untuk penonton tunarungu, sulit mendengar, tuna netra atau tuna netra parsial. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > Tetapkan kode, Ubah kode. Mengaktifkan pengaturan akses universal Catatan: (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Akses universal > Aktif. Jika Anda lupa kode PIN, Anda dapat menimpa kode saat ini menggunakan 8888 dan memasukkan kode baru. Kode penguncian anak digunakan untuk mengunci atau membuka kunci saluran atau program. Akses universal bagi orang yang sulit mendengar (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Sulit mendengar > Aktif. Penguncian Program Beberapa saluran TV digital menyiarkan audio dan terjemahan khusus yang disesuaikan untuk orang yang sulit mendengar atau tuna rungu. Setelah diaktifkan, TV secara otomatis beralih ke audio dan terjemahan yang disesuaikan, jika tersedia. berperingkat Mengatur usia minimal untuk menonton program (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > Peringkat org tua. Penguncian Aplikasi Akses universal bagi tuna netra atau tuna netra parsial Mengatur penguncian aplikasi Galeri Aplikasi (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Deskripsi audio > Deskripsi audio > Aktif. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > Kunci Aplikasi. Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi yang tidak cocok untuk anak-anak. Anda dapat mengunci aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi atau menyiapkan profil terbatas di menu Awal. Saluran TV digital dapat menyiarkan komentar audio khusus yang menjelaskan apa yang sedang terjadi di layar. (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Akses universal > Deskripsi audio > Deskripsi audio > Volume campuran, Efek audio, Ucapan. 18+ Kunci aplikasi 18+ akan meminta kode PIN saat Anda mencoba memulai aplikasi dengan rating 18+. Kunci ini hanya berlaku untuk aplikasi dengan rating 18+ dari Galeri Aplikasi Philips. Pilih Volume campuran, Anda dapat mencampur volume audio normal dengan komentar audio. Tekan panah (naik) atau (turun) untuk menyesuaikan nilai. Atur Efek audio ke Aktif untuk efek audio ekstra dalam audio komentar, seperti suara stereo atau memudar. Pilih Ucapan untuk mengatur preferensi ucapan, Keterangan, atau Terjemahan. Profil terbatas Anda dapat menyiapkan profil terbatas untuk menu Awal di mana yang tersedia hanyalah aplikasi yang Anda izinkan. Anda perlu memasukan kode PIN untuk menyiapkan dan mengaktifkan profil terbatas. Google Play Store - Kedewasaan Di Google Play Store, Anda dapat menyembunyikan aplikasi sesuai dengan kedewasaan pengguna/pembeli. Anda perlu memasukkan kode PIN untuk memilih atau mengubah tingkat kedewasaan. Tingkat kedewasaan akan menentukan aplikasi mana yang tersedia untuk diinstal Pengaturan Kunci 57

58 Penguncian CAM Mengatur PIN CAM untuk merekam (Menu TV) > Pengaturan > Penguncian anak > PIN CAM. 58

59 Video, Foto dan Musik Menu Paling Populer dan Menu Terakhir Diputar Anda dapat melihat foto Anda atau memutar musik dan video dari komputer atau NAS (Network Attached Storage) di jaringan rumah Anda. Melihat file paling populer atau menghapus daftar 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih Paling populer. 3 - Pilih salah satu file dan tekan OK untuk melihat file atau tekan Hapus semua untuk menghapus daftar. TV dan komputer atau NAS harus berada di jaringan rumah yang sama. Di komputer atau NAS Anda, Anda perlu menginstal Perangkat Lunak Server Media. Server Media Anda harus diatur untuk berbagi file dengan TV. TV menampilkan file dan folder Anda sebagaimana file dan folder tersebut diorganisir oleh Server Media atau sebagaimana file dan folder tersebut disusun di komputer atau NAS. Melihat file yang terakhir diputar 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih Terakhir diputar. 3 - Pilih salah satu file dan tekan OK untuk melihat file atau tekan Hapus semua untuk menghapus daftar. TV ini tidak mendukung terjemahan pada streaming video dari komputer atau NAS Jika Server Media mendukung pencarian file, bidang pencarian akan tersedia. Dari Sambungan USB Untuk menelusuri dan memutar file di komputer Anda dapat melihat foto atau memutar musik dan video dari flash drive USB atau Hard Drive USB yang tersambung Dari Komputer atau NAS 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih Jaringan dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat SimplyShare dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Anda bisa menelusuri dan memutar file. 4 - Untuk berhenti memutar video, foto dan musik, tekan EXIT. Dengan TV yang dinyalakan, colokkan flash drive USB atau Hard Drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB. TV mendeteksi perangkat dan akan mencantumkan file media Anda. Jika daftar file tidak muncul otomatis 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Anda bisa menelusuri file di struktur folder yang sudah Anda tata di drive. 4 - Tekan Putar semua untuk memutar semua file di folder USB atau tekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder yang dipilih ke menu favorit- Favorit. 5 - Untuk berhenti memutar video, foto dan musik, tekan EXIT Menu Favorit Menambahkan folder atau file ke menu favorit 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih folder atau file. 3 - Tekan Tandai favorit (hijau) untuk menambahkan folder atau file yang dipilih ke menu favorit. Peringatan Jika Anda mencoba menjeda atau merekam dengan Hard Drive USB yang tersambung, TV akan meminta Anda untuk memformat Hard Drive USB. Pemformatan ini akan menghapus semua file saat ini di Hard Drive USB. Melihat file favorit 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan pilih Favorit. 3 - Anda dapat melihat semua file favorit di daftar. 59

60 7 - Bahasa audio: pilih bahasa audio 8 - Acak: memutar file Anda secara acak 9 - Ulangi: memutar semua video di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus 14.5 Memutar Video Anda Memutar Video Jika tombol INFO tersedia di remote control Anda Membuka folder video 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Video, Anda dapat menekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder video ke menu favorit - Favorit. Opsi Video Telusuri file video... Daftar/Gambar mini Tayangan daftar atau gambar mini Acak Memutar file Anda secara acak Ulangi Memutar semua video di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus Info Menampilkan informasi video Memutar video 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Video dan pilih salah satu video, Anda dapat menekan Putar semua untuk memutar semua file di folder atau tekan Tandai sebagai favorit untuk menambahkan video yang dipilih ke menu favorit - Favorit. Memutar file video... Tandai sebagai favorit Menandai video sebagai favorit Pengaturan terjemahan Mengatur warna, posisi, dan ukuran font terjemahan...dll Info Menampilkan informasi video Bilah kontrol Untuk menampilkan atau menyembunyikan bilah kontrol saat video diputar, tekan INFO Melihat Foto Anda Melihat Foto Membuka folder foto 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Foto, Anda dapat menekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder foto ke menu favorit - Favorit atau tekan Urutkan untuk menemukan foto dengan cepat. 1 - Panel kemajuan 2 - Bilah kontrol pemutaran - : Lompat ke video sebelumnya di folder - : Lompat ke video berikutnya di folder - : Putar mundur - : Maju cepat - : Jeda pemutaran Melihat foto 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Foto dan pilih salah satu foto, Anda dapat menekan Tayangan slide untuk memutar semua file di folder atau tekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan foto yang dipilih ke menu favorit - Favorit. 3 - Tandai sebagai favorit 4 - Putar semua video 5 - Terjemahan: beralih ke Terjemahan aktif, Tidak aktif, atau Aktif Saat Diam. 6 - Bahasa terjemahan: pilih Bahasa Terjemahan 60

61 14.7 Bilah kontrol Memutar Musik Anda Memutar Musik Membuka folder foto 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Musik, Anda dapat menekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan folder musik ke menu favorit - Favorit. 4 - Anda dapat menemukan musik dengan cepat menggunakan klasifikasi - Genre, Artis, Album, Trek. 1 - Bilah kontrol pemutaran - : Lompat ke foto sebelumnya di folder - : Lompat ke foto berikutnya di folder - : Jeda pemutaran tayangan slide Memutar musik 1 - Tekan SOURCES, pilih USB dan 2 - Pilih Perangkat USB dan tekan (kanan) untuk memilih perangkat USB yang Anda perlukan. 3 - Pilih Musik dan pilih salah satu klasifikasi untuk melihat file musik. 4 - Pilih musik dan Anda dapat menekan Putar semua untuk memutar semua file di folder atau tekan Tandai favorit untuk menambahkan musik yang dipilih ke menu favorit - Favorit. 2 - Tandai sebagai favorit 3 - Mulai tayangan slide 4 - Putar foto 5 - Acak: memutar file Anda secara acak 6 - Ulangi: memutar semua foto di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus 7 - Menghentikan pemutaran musik di latar belakang 8 - Mengatur kecepatan tayangan slide Bilah kontrol Opsi Foto Telusuri file foto... Daftar/Gambar mini Tayangan daftar atau gambar mini Acak Memutar file Anda secara acak Ulangi Memutar tayangan slide sekali atau terusmenerus Kecepatan Tayangan Slide Mengatur kecepatan tayangan slide 1 - Panel kemajuan 2 - Bilah kontrol pemutaran - : Lompat ke musik sebelumnya di folder - : Lompat ke musik berikutnya di folder - : Putar mundur - : Maju cepat - : Jeda pemutaran Memutar file foto... Tandai sebagai favorit Menandai foto sebagai favorit Info Menampilkan informasi video 3 - Tandai sebagai favorit 4 - Putar semua musik 5 - Acak: memutar file Anda secara acak 6 - Ulangi: memutar semua musik di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus 61

62 Opsi Musik Telusuri file musik... Acak Memutar file Anda secara acak. Ulangi Memutar semua lagu di folder ini satu kali atau terus-menerus. Memutar file musik... Tandai sebagai favorit Menandai musik sebagai favorit Info Menampilkan informasi musik 62

63 mengubah pengaturan ke Dari Internet atau sebaliknya. TV mungkin sudah otomatis beralih ke Dari Internet. Untuk membuat rekaman tersedia di daftar rekaman, alihkan ke pengaturan yang dipilih saat rekaman dibuat. 15 Panduan TV 15.1 Apa yang Anda Perlukan 15.3 Dengan Panduan TV Anda bisa melihat daftar program TV saat ini dan yang dijadwalkan di saluran Anda. Bergantung pada sumber informasi (data) panduan TV, saluran analog dan digital atau hanya saluran digital yang ditampilkan. Tidak semua saluran dilengkapi informasi Panduan TV. Menggunakan Panduan TV Membuka Panduan TV Untuk membuka Panduan TV, tekan TV GUIDE. Panduan TV menunjukkan saluran dari tuner yang dipilih. TV bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang diinstal di TV. TV tidak bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang dilihat dari penerima atau dekoder digital. Tekan TV GUIDE lagi untuk menutupnya. Pertama kali Anda membuka Panduan TV, TV akan memindai semua saluran TV untuk informasi program. Pemindaian ini bisa berlangsung beberapa menit. Data Panduan TV disimpan dalam TV Data Panduan TV Panduan TV menerima informasi (data) dari stasiun penyiaran atau dari Internet. Di beberapa wilayah dan untuk beberapa saluran, informasi Panduan TV mungkin tidak tersedia. TV bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV untuk saluran yang diinstal di TV. TV tidak bisa mengumpulkan informasi Panduan TV dari saluran yang dilihat dari penerima atau dekoder digital. Mencari Program Dari Panduan TV, Anda dapat beralih ke program saat ini. Untuk beralih ke program (saluran), pilih program dan TV dilengkapi dengan informasi yang diatur ke Dari Stasiun penyiaran. Melihat detail program Jika informasi Panduan TV berasal dari Internet, Panduan TV juga bisa mencantumkan saluran analog di samping saluran digital. Menu Panduan TV juga menampilkan layar kecil dengan saluran saat ini. 1 - Tekan INFO. 2 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Untuk memunculkan detail program yang dipilih Dari Internet Ubah Hari Jika TV tersambung ke Internet, Anda dapat mengatur TV untuk menerima informasi Panduan TV dari Internet. Panduan TV dapat menampilkan program terjadwal untuk hari-hari yang akan datang (maksimal hingga 8 hari). Untuk mengatur informasi Panduan TV Tekan tombol berwarna Hari dan pilih hari yang diperlukan. 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Pengaturan Umum dan tekan (kanan) untuk masuk ke menu. 3 - Pilih Lanjutan > Panduan TV > Dari Internet dan 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Mengatur Pengingat Anda dapat menetapkan pengingat untuk sebuah program. Sebuah pesan akan mengingatkan Anda di awal program. Anda dapat beralih ke saluran ini dengan segera. Rekaman yang hilang Jika beberapa rekaman terlihat hilang dari daftar rekaman, info (data) Panduan TV mungkin berubah. Rekaman yang dibuat dengan pengaturan Dari Stasiun Penyiaran akan hilang dari daftar jika Anda Dalam Panduan TV, program dengan pengingat ditandai dengan sebuah (jam). Untuk mengatur pengingat 63

64 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program yang akan datang. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Atur pengingat dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Mengatur Rekaman Anda dapat mengatur rekaman dalam Panduan TV. Untuk melihat daftar rekaman, tekan Rekaman, program yang akan direkam ditandai dengan (titik merah) di bagian depan nama program. Untuk menghapus pengingat 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program dengan pengingat. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Hapus p'ingat dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk merekam program 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program yang akan datang atau sedang berlangsung. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekam. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk membatalkan rekaman Cari menurut Genre 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV dan pilih program yang sebelumnya sudah diatur untuk direkam. 2 - Tekan tombol warna Hapus Rekaman. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Jika informasi tersedia, Anda dapat melihat program terjadwal menurut genre-nya seperti film, olahraga, dsb. Lihat bab Menjeda TV dan Perekaman untuk informasi selengkapnya. Untuk mencari program berdasarkan genre 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS. 3 - Pilih Cari menurut genre dan 4 - Pilih bahasa yang Anda inginkan dan Daftar dengan program yang ditemukan akan ditampilkan. 5 - Anda dapat membuat pengingat atau menjadwalkan rekaman program terpilih. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang Perekaman, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Perekaman. Tidak tersedia saat memilih saluran DVB-S Daftar Pengingat Anda dapat menampilkan jadwal pengingat yang telah Anda buat. Daftar Pengingat Untuk membuka daftar pengingat 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di bagian atas layar, pilih Terjadwal dan 4 - Dalam daftar jadwal rekaman dan pengingat, pilih tab Pengingat dan tekan OK agar menampilkan hanya pengingat. 5 - Tekan tombol warna Hapus untuk menghapus pengingat yang dipilih. Tekan tombol warna Rekam untuk merekam program yang dipilih. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. 64

65 hanya akan berlangsung selama 30 menit. Anda dapat menyesuaikan waktu akhir perekaman di daftar Perekaman. 16 Perekaman dan Menjeda TV Menjadwalkan Perekaman Anda dapat menjadwalkan perekaman program berikutnya untuk hari ini atau beberapa hari dari hari ini (maksimum 8 hari lagi). TV akan menggunakan data dari Panduan TV untuk memulai dan mengakhiri perekaman Merekam Apa yang Anda Perlukan Untuk merekam program Anda dapat merekam siaran TV digital dan menontonnya nanti. 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Di halaman Panduan TV, pilih saluran dan program yang ingin Anda rekam. Tekan (kanan) atau (kiri) untuk menggulir program dari suatu saluran. Tekan tombol berwarna Hari untuk memilih hari yang diperlukan. 3 - Dengan program yang disorot, tekan tombol berwarna Rekam. Program dijadwalkan untuk direkam. Peringatan akan menunjukkan secara otomatis saat terdapat jadwal yang bertabrakan. Jika Anda berencana untuk merekam program saat Anda tidak ada di depan TV, jangan lupa untuk membiarkan TV dalam keadaan siaga dan Hard Drive USB diaktifkan. 4 - TV menambahkan beberapa margin waktu di akhir program. Anda dapat menyesuaikan margin ini dengan Akhiri Margin Otomatis. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk merekam program TV Anda perlu... Hard Drive USB yang tersambung yang diformat di TV ini saluran TV digital yang terinstal pada TV ini menerima informasi saluran untuk Panduan TV pada layar pengaturan jam TV yang andal. Jika Anda mengatur ulang jam TV secara manual, perekaman bisa gagal. Anda tidak dapat merekam ketika Anda menggunakan Jeda TV. Untuk mematuhi undang-undang hak cipta, beberapa penyedia layanan DVB dapat menerapkan pembatasan yang berbeda dalam hal teknologi DRM (Digital Right Management). Dalam hal siaran saluran yang dilindungi, perekaman, validitas rekaman, atau jumlah tayangan dapat dibatasi. Merekam dapat sepenuhnya dilarang. Jika mencoba merekam siaran yang dilindungi atau memutar rekaman yang kedaluwarsa, sebuah pesan kesalahan dapat muncul. Daftar Rekaman Untuk informasi selengkapnya tentang cara memasang Hard Drive USB, di Bantuan tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Hard Drive USB, penginstalan. Anda dapat melihat atau mengatur rekaman Anda di daftar rekaman. Di sebelah daftar rekaman, terdapat daftar terpisah untuk perekaman terjadwal dan pengingat. Catatan: Fungsi perekaman hanya untuk siaran TV digital. Konten dari perangkat eksternal (misalnya HDMI) tidak dapat direkam. Untuk membuka daftar rekaman. 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di daftar rekaman, pilih tab Baru, Ditonton atau Kedaluwarsa dan tekan OK untuk memfilter tontonan Anda. 4 - Dengan rekaman yang dipilih pada daftar, Anda dapat menghapus rekaman dengan tombol berwarna Hapus atau menghentikan rekaman yang sedang berlangsung dengan tombol berwarna Hentikan Rekaman. Anda dapat mengganti nama rekaman dengan tombol berwarna Ganti nama. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Merekam Program Merekam Sekarang Untuk merekam program yang Anda tonton, tekan (Rekam) di remote control. Perekaman akan segera dimulai. Untuk menghentikan perekaman, tekan (Berhenti). Stasiun penyiaran dapat membatasi jumlah hari suatu rekaman dapat dilihat. Ketika periode ini berakhir, rekaman akan ditandai sebagai kedaluwarsa. Rekaman di daftar dapat menunjukkan jumlah hari sebelum rekaman kedaluwarsa. Ketika data Panduan TV tersedia, program yang Anda tonton akan disimpan dari saat Anda menekan tombol perekaman sampai program berakhir. Jika tidak ada data Panduan TV yang tersedia, perekaman 65

66 Jika perekaman terjadwal dicegah oleh stasiun penyiaran atau jika siaran terganggu, rekaman ditandai sebagai Gagal. Ketika dua perekaman yang terjadwal bertabrakan waktunya, terjadi konflik rekaman. Untuk mengatasi konflik perekaman, Anda dapat menyesuaikan waktu mulai dan berakhir dari salah satu atau kedua rekaman terjadwal. 4 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Jadwal dan 5 - Pilih tuner dari tempat Anda ingin merekam dan 6 - Pilih saluran yang akan direkam dan 7 - Pilih hari perekaman dan 8 - Atur waktu mulai dan akhir perekaman. Pilih salah satu tombol dan gunakan tombol (naik) atau (turun) untuk mengatur jam dan menit. 9 - Pilih Rekam dan tekan OK untuk menjadwalkan perekaman manual. Untuk menyesuaikan waktu mulai dan akhir dari suatu perekaman terjadwal... Rekaman akan muncul dalam daftar perekaman terjadwal dan pengingat. Konflik Perekaman 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di bagian atas layar, pilih Terjadwal dan 4 - Di daftar perekaman terjadwal dan pengingat, pilih tab Pengingat dan tekan OK untuk menampilkan perekaman terjadwal saja. 5 - Pilih perekaman terjadwal yang bertabrakan dengan perekaman terjadwal lain dan tekan tombol berwarna Sesuaikan Waktu. 6 - Pilih waktu mulai dan akhir dan ubah waktu dengan tombol (naik) atau (turun). Pilih Terapkan dan 7 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Menonton Rekaman Untuk menonton rekaman 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di daftar rekaman, pilih rekaman yang Anda perlukan dan tekan OK untuk mulai menonton. 4 - Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (jeda), (putar), (mundur), (maju cepat) atau (berhenti). 5 - Untuk beralih kembali untuk menonton TV, tekan EXIT. Margin Akhir Otomatis 16.2 Menjeda TV Anda dapat mengatur margin waktu yang TV akan tambahkan secara otomatis di akhir setiap rekaman terjadwal. Apa yang Anda Perlukan Untuk mengatur margin waktu akhir otomatis Anda dapat menghentikan sementara siaran TV digital dan melanjutkan menonton nanti. 1 - Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Tekan OPTIONS dan pilih Margin Akhir Otomatis lalu 4 - Tekan (naik) atau (turun) dan tekan OK untuk mengatur margin waktu yang ditambahkan ke rekaman secara otomatis. Anda dapat menambahkan hingga 45 menit untuk rekaman. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Untuk menjeda program TV Anda perlu... Hard Drive USB yang tersambung yang diformat di TV ini saluran TV digital yang terinstal pada TV ini menerima informasi saluran untuk Panduan TV pada layar Dengan Hard drive USB yang tersambung dan terformat, TV terus menyimpan siaran TV yang Anda tonton. Saat beralih ke saluran lain, siaran saluran sebelumnya dihapus. Juga saat Anda mengubah TV ke siaga, siaran terhapus. Perekaman Manual Anda dapat menjadwalkan perekaman yang tidak ditautkan dengan program TV. Anda mengatur jenis tuner, saluran dan waktu mulai dan akhir sendiri. Anda tidak dapat menggunakan Jeda TV saat Anda merekam. Untuk informasi selengkapnya, di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari Hard Drive USB, penginstalan. Untuk menjadwalkan perekaman secara manual Tekan PANDUAN TV. 2 - Tekan tombol berwarna Rekaman. 3 - Di bagian atas layar, pilih Terjadwal dan 66

67 Menjeda Program Untuk menjeda dan melanjutkan siaran... Untuk menjeda siaran, tekan (Jeda). Panel kemajuan di bawah layar muncul secara singkat. Untuk memunculkan panel kemajuan, tekan (Jeda) kembali. Untuk melanjutkan, tekan (Putar). Dengan panel kemajuan di layar, tekan (Mundur) atau tekan (Maju) untuk memilih dari tempat Anda ingin mulai melihat siaran yang dijeda. Tekan tombol ini berulang kali untuk mengubah kecepatan. Anda dapat menjeda siaran untuk jangka waktu maksimal 90 menit. Untuk beralih kembali ke siaran TV langsung, tekan (Berhenti). Memutar Ulang Selama TV menyimpan siaran yang Anda tonton, Anda dapat memutar ulang sebagian besar siaran selama beberapa detik. Untuk memutar ulang siaran saat ini Tekan (Jeda) 2 - Tekan (Mundur). Anda dapat menekan secara berulang kali untuk memilih dari mana Anda ingin mulai melihat siaran yang dijeda. Tekan tombol ini berulang kali untuk mengubah kecepatan. Pada satu titik Anda akan mencapai permulaan penyimpanan siaran atau jangka waktu maksimum. 3 - Tekan (Putar) untuk melihat siaran kembali. 4 - Tekan (Berhenti) untuk menonton siaran secara langsung. 67

68 17 Memproyeksikan ke TV Anda... Smartphone dan Tablet Untuk memproyeksikan aplikasi ke layar TV Aplikasi Remote TV Philips 1 - Di smartphone atau tablet Anda, buka aplikasi yang mendukung Google Cast. 2 - Ketuk ikon Google Cast. 3 - Pilih TV yang ingin dijadikan tujuan proyeksi. 4 - Tekan putar pada smartphone atau tablet Anda. Apa yang Anda pilih akan mulai diputar di TV. Aplikasi Remote TV Philips yang baru di smartphone atau tablet Anda adalah sahabat baru TV Anda Dengan Aplikasi Remote TV, Anda menguasai media di sekitar Anda. Kirim foto, musik, atau video ke layar TV besar Anda atau tonton salah satu saluran TV secara langsung di tablet atau ponsel Anda. Cari yang ingin Anda tonton di Panduan TV dan tonton di ponsel atau TV. Dengan Aplikasi Remote TV, Anda bisa menggunakan ponsel sebagai remote control. AirPlay Untuk menambahkan fungsi AirPlay ke TV Android, Anda bisa mengunduh dan menginstal salah satu aplikasi Android yang memiliki fungsi tersebut. Anda bisa menemukan beberapa aplikasi ini di Google Play Store. Unduh Aplikasi Remote TV Philips dari app store favorit Anda Aplikasi Remote TV Philips tersedia gratis untuk ios dan Android. MHL TV ini kompatibel dengan MHL Jika perangkat seluler Anda juga kompatibel dengan MHL, Anda bisa menyambungkan perangkat seluler ke TV dengan kabel MHL. Dengan menyambungkan kabel MHL, Anda bisa menampilkan apa yang ada di perangkat seluler di layar TV. Baterai perangkat seluler Anda juga akan diisi dayanya. Sambungan MHL cocok untuk menonton film atau bermain game dari perangkat seluler Anda di TV dalam waktu yang lebih lama. Google Cast Apa yang Anda Perlukan Jika aplikasi di perangkat seluler Anda memiliki Google Cast, Anda bisa memproyeksikan aplikasi Anda di TV ini. Di aplikasi seluler, cari ikon Google Cast. Anda bisa menggunakan perangkat seluler untuk mengontrol apa yang ada di TV. Google Cast bisa digunakan di Android dan ios. Mengisi Daya Perangkat seluler Anda harus disambungkan ke jaringan rumah Wi-Fi yang sama seperti TV. Dengan menyambungkan kabel MHL, perangkat Anda akan terisi dayanya saat TV dinyalakan (tidak dalam mode siaga). Aplikasi dengan Google Cast Kabel MHL Aplikasi Google Cast baru selalu tersedia. Anda bisa mencobanya dengan YouTube, Chrome, Netflix, Photowall atau Big Web Quiz untuk Chromecast. Lihat juga google.com/cast Anda memerlukan kabel MHL pasif (HDMI ke Micro USB) untuk menyambungkan perangkat seluler ke TV. Anda mungkin memerlukan adaptor ekstra untuk menyambung ke perangkat seluler Anda. Untuk menyambungkan kabel MHL ke TV, gunakan sambungan HDMI 1 MHL. Beberapa produk dan fitur Google Play tidak tersedia di semua negara. Dapatkan informasi selengkapnya di support.google.com/androidtv MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link dan Logo MHL adalah merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari MHL, LLC. 68

69 Tentang Pilihan Teratas TV harus memiliki penginstalan saluran. TV ini harus tersambung ke Internet. jam TV harus diatur ke Otomatis atau Tergantung Negara. Anda harus menerima Ketentuan penggunaan (Anda mungkin sudah menerimanya saat tersambung ke Internet.). Dengan Pilihan Teratas, TV Anda menyarankan Ikon hanya akan muncul di bagian atas layar saat Sekarang di TV tersedia. 18 Pilihan Teratas 18.1 program TV saat ini di Sekarang di TV layanan TV online (Catch Up TV) di TV on Demand video rental terbaru di Video on Demand layanan TV online (Catch Up TV) dari Freeview di Freeview Play TV tidak menyimpan rekomendasi sebelumnya. Menggunakan Sekarang di TV Untuk menikmati Pilihan Teratas, sambungkan TV ke Internet. Pastikan Anda menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaannya. Informasi dan layanan Pilihan Teratas hanya tersedia di negara-negara terpilih. Untuk membuka Sekarang di TV 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih Sekarang di TV di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Ketentuan Penggunaan Untuk memungkinkan TV memberikan rekomendasi ini, Anda harus menyetujui Ketentuan Penggunaan. Untuk mendapatkan rekomendasi yang disesuaikan kebiasaan menonton Anda, pastikan Anda mencentang kotak Memilih Berlangganan Layanan Rekomendasi Pribadi. Saat Anda membuka Sekarang di TV, TV mungkin perlu beberapa detik untuk menyegarkan informasi halaman. Di Sekarang di TV Anda dapat memilih dan menekan OK pada ikon program untuk mencari program yang sedang dilihat. memilih dan menekan OK pada ikon program terjadwal untuk mencari saluran tersebut. Untuk membuka Ketentuan Penggunaan 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS. 2 - Tekan OPTIONS, pilih Ketentuan Penggunaan dan 3 - Pilih Pengaturan Privasi, dan 4 - Pilih Memilih Berlangganan Layanan Rekomendasi Pribadi dan tekan OK untuk mencentang kotak. Tekan OK lagi untuk menghapus centang. 5 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu. Anda dapat menggunakan tombol berwarna pada remote control untuk memulai, menghentikan, atau menghapus perekaman terjadwal. Anda juga dapat mengatur atau menghapus pengingat yang memperingatkan saat suatu program dimulai. Untuk membiarkan Sekarang di TV tanpa mencari saluran lainnya, tekan BACK Sekarang di TV TV on Demand Tentang Sekarang di TV Tentang TV on Demand Dengan Sekarang di TV, TV merekomendasikan 10 program paling populer untuk ditonton saat ini. Dengan TV on Demand, Anda dapat menonton program TV yang Anda lewatkan atau menonton program favorit setiap kali itu sesuai. Layanan ini disebut juga Catch Up TV, Replay TV atau Online TV. Program yang tersedia di TV on Demand bisa ditonton secara gratis. TV merekomendasikan program di TV sekarang atau dimulai dalam 15 menit. Program yang direkomendasikan dipilih dari saluran yang Anda instal. Pilihan dibuat dari saluran pilihan Anda. Selain itu, Anda dapat memungkinkan Sekarang di TV melakukan beberapa rekomendasi yang dipersonalisasi untuk Anda, berdasarkan program yang Anda tonton secara reguler. Untuk menyediakan Sekarang di TV Anda dapat membiarkan TV on Demand melakukan rekomendasi program yang dipersonalisasi, berdasarkan pemasangan TV dan program yang Anda tonton secara teratur. informasi Sekarang di TV harus tersedia di negara Anda. Ikon hanya akan muncul di bagian atas layar saat TV on Demand tersedia. 69

70 4 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Menggunakan TV on Demand Saat Anda membuka Video on Demand, TV mungkin perlu beberapa detik untuk menyegarkan informasi halaman. Untuk membuka TV on Demand 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih TV on Demand di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Tekan (turun) untuk membuka halaman dalam format layar penuh. 4 - Anda dapat memilih stasiun penyiaran tertentu jika tersedia lebih dari satu pilihan. 5 - Pilih ikon program dan tekan OK untuk mulai menonton. 6 - Tekan BACK untuk menutupnya. Anda dapat memilih toko video tertentu jika tersedia lebih dari satu pilihan. Untuk menyewa film 1 - Pindahkan sorotan pada poster film. Info terbatas akan ditampilkan setelah beberapa detik. 2 - Tekan OK untuk membuka halaman film toko video untuk melihat sinopsis suatu film. 3 - Konfirmasi pesanan Anda. 4 - Lakukan pembayaran di TV. 5 - Mulai tonton. Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (Putar) dan (Jeda). Saat Anda membuka TV on Demand, TV mungkin perlu beberapa detik untuk menyegarkan informasi halaman. Setelah program dimulai, Anda dapat menggunakan tombol (Putar) dan (Jeda) Video on Demand Tentang Video on Demand Dengan Video on Demand, Anda dapat menyewa film dari toko video rental online. Anda dapat membiarkan Video on Demand melakukan rekomendasi film yang dipersonalisasi, berdasarkan negara Anda, pemasangan TV, dan program yang Anda tonton secara teratur. Ikon hanya akan muncul di bagian atas layar saat Video on Demand tersedia. Pembayaran Saat menyewa atau membeli film, Anda dapat membayar toko video secara aman dengan kartu kredit. Sebagian besar toko video meminta Anda membuat akun login saat pertama kali menyewa film. Trafik Internet Melakukan streaming banyak video bisa membuat Anda melebihi batas trafik Internet bulanan. Menggunakan Video on Demand Untuk membuka Video on Demand 1 - Tekan TOP PICKS untuk membuka menu Pilihan Teratas. 2 - Pilih Video on Demand di bagian atas layar dan 3 - Gunakan tombol navigasi untuk memilih poster film. 70

71 19 Menu Awal 19.1 Membuka menu Awal Untuk membuka menu Awal dan membuka item 1 - Tekan HOME. 2 - Pilih item dan tekan OK untuk membuka atau memulainya. 3 - Tekan BACK untuk menutup menu Awal tanpa memulai apa pun Profil Terbatas Anda dapat membatasi penggunaan aplikasi tertentu dengan mengalihkan TV ke profil terbatas. Profil yang dibatasi ini hanya akan mengizinkan penggunaan aplikasi yang telah Anda pilih. Anda hanya dapat keluar dari profil ini dengan kode PIN. Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda tidak dapat Menemukan atau membuka aplikasi yang ditandai sebagai Tidak diizinkan Mengakses Google Play Store Membeli melalui Google Play Movies & TV, dan Google Play Games Menggunakan aplikasi pihak ketiga yang tidak menggunakan sign-in Google Dengan TV yang dialihkan ke profil terbatas, Anda dapat Melihat konten yang sudah disewa atau dibeli dari Google Play Movies & TV Bermain permainan yang sudah dibeli dan dipasang dari Google Play Games Mengakses pengaturan berikut ini: Jaringan Wi-Fi, Ucapan dan Aksesibilitas Menambah aksesori Bluetooth Akun Google pada TV akan tetap log in. Penggunaan profil terbatas tidak mengubah Akun Google. 71

72 20 Netflix Jika berlangganan keanggotaan Netflix, Anda dapat menikmati Netflix di TV ini. TV Anda harus tersambung ke Internet. Netflix mungkin hanya tersedia dengan pembaruan perangkat lunak di masa depan untuk wilayah Anda. Untuk membuka Netflix, tekan untuk membuka Aplikasi Netflix. Anda dapat segera membuka Netflix dari TV saat siaga. 72

73 Pilih USB dan tekan Perangkat lunak Mengidentifikasi TV 1 - Masukkan flash drive USB ke salah satu sambungan USB TV. 2 - Pilih Tulis ke USB dan File identifikasi tertulis pada flash drive USB Perbarui Perangkat Lunak OK. Unduh perangkat lunak 1 - Masukkan flash drive USB ke komputer Anda. 2 - Di perangkat flash drive USB, cari file update.htm dan klik dua kali. 3 - Klik Kirim ID. 4 - Jika tersedia perangkat lunak baru, unduh file zip. 5 - Setelah diunduh, buka zip file dan salin file autorun.upg ke flash drive USB. Jangan letakkan file ini di dalam folder. Perbarui dari Internet Jika TV tersambung ke Internet, Anda mungkin menerima pesan untuk memperbarui perangkat lunak TV. Anda memerlukan koneksi Internet berkecepatantinggi (broadband). Jika Anda menerima pesan ini, sebaiknya lakukan pembaruan. Perbarui perangkat lunak TV 1 - Masukkan flash drive USB ke TV lagi. Pembaruan dimulai secara otomatis. 2 - Pembaruan perangkat lunak bisa berlangsung beberapa menit. Jangan tekan tombol pada TV atau remote control. Jangan lepaskan flash drive USB. 3 - Jika pembaruan selesai, TV akan kembali ke saluran yang tadinya Anda tonton. Dengan pesan muncul di layar, pilih Perbarui dan ikuti petunjuk di layar. Anda juga bisa mencari pembaruan perangkat lunak sendiri. Selama pembaruan perangkat lunak, tidak ada gambar dan TV akan mati dan nyala kembali. Ini mungkin terjadi beberapa kali. Pembaruan ini akan memerlukan waktu beberapa menit. Tunggu hingga gambar TV kembali muncul. Jangan tekan tombol daya pada TV atau pada remote control selama pembaruan perangkat lunak. Jika terjadi listrik mati saat pembaruan, jangan sekalikali melepas flash drive USB dari TV. Ketika daya listrik menyala kembali, pembaruan akan dilanjutkan. Untuk mencegah pembaruan perangkat lunak TV yang tidak disengaja, hapus file autorun.upg dari flash drive USB. Untuk mencari tahu pembaruan perangkat lunak sendiri 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Cari Pembaruan dan 3 - Pilih Internet dan 4 - TV akan mencari pembaruan di Internet. 5 - Jika pembaruan tersedia, Anda bisa langsung memperbarui perangkat lunak. 6 - Pembaruan perangkat lunak bisa berlangsung beberapa menit. Jangan tekan tombol pada TV atau remote control. 7 - Jika pembaruan selesai, TV akan kembali ke saluran yang tadinya Anda tonton Versi Perangkat Lunak Untuk melihat versi perangkat lunak TV saat ini 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Info Perangkat Lunak Saat Ini dan 3 - Versi, catatan rilis dan tanggal pembuatan akan ditampilkan. Selain itu, Nomor ESN Netflix juga ditampilkan, jika ada. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Perbarui dari USB Mungkin perangkat lunak TV perlu diperbarui Anda memerlukan komputer dengan koneksi Internet berkecepatan-tinggi dan flash drive USB untuk mengunggah perangkat lunak di TV. Drive minimal harus berkapasitas 2 Gb. Pastikan perlindungan penulisan dinonaktifkan. Pembaruan Perangkat Lunak Otomatis Untuk mengaktifkan Pembaruan perangkat lunak otomatis agar dapat memperbarui perangkat lunak TV Anda secara otomatis. Biarkan TV dalam mode siaga. Untuk memperbarui perangkat lunak TV 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Cari Pembaruan dan 1 - Tekan, pilih Semua Pengaturan dan 2 - Pilih Perbarui Prgkt Lunak > Pembaruan 73

74 Perangkat Lunak Otomatis dan 3 - Ikuti petunjuk pada layar. 4 - Tekan (kiri) berulang kali jika perlu, untuk menutup menu. Open Source Android (7.1.1) This tv contains the Android Nougat Software. Android is a Linux-based operating system designed primarily for touchscreen mobile devices such as smartphones and tablet computers. This software will also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2 ( ). This includes all external sources used by official Android AOSP Perangkat Lunak Sumber Terbuka Televisi ini menggunakan perangkat lunak sumber terbuka. TP Vision Europe B.V. dengan ini menawarkan, berdasarkan permintaan, untuk memberikan salinan kode sumber lengkap yang sesuai untuk paket perangkat lunak Sumber Terbuka berhak cipta yang digunakan dalam produk ini di mana tawaran tersebut diminta oleh lisensi yang sesuai. linux kernel ( ) Tawaran ini berlaku hingga tiga tahun setelah pembelian produk bagi siapa pun yang menerima informasi ini. Untuk mendapatkan kode sumber, kirimkan surat dalam bahasa Inggris kepada... This tv contains the Linux Kernel. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. Additionally, following exception applies: "NOTE! This copyright does not cover user programs that use kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely considered normal use of the kernel, and does not fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds" open.source@tpvision.com 21.5 Lisensi Sumber Terbuka Tentang Lisensi Sumber Terbuka README untuk kode sumber dari bagian perangkat lunak TV TP Vision Netherlands B.V. yang berada di bawah lisensi sumber terbuka. Ini adalah dokumen yang menjelaskan distribusi kode sumber yang digunakan pada TV TP Vision Netherlands B.V., yang berada di bawah GNU General Public License (GPL) atau GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), atau lisensi sumber terbuka lainnya. Instruksi untuk mendapatkan salinan perangkat lunak ini dapat ditemukan di Petunjuk Penggunaan. libcurl (7.50.1) libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS, Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS, POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP, SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading, HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies, user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM, Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy tunneling and more! The original download site for this software is : COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) , Daniel Stenberg, daniel@haxx.se. All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. TP Vision Netherlands B.V. TIDAK MENJAMIN APA PUN, BAIK TERSURAT MAUPUN TERSIRAT, TERMASUK GARANSI PENJUALAN ATAU KELAYAKAN UNTUK TUJUAN TERTENTU, MENGENAI PERANGKAT LUNAK INI. TP Vision Netherlands B.V. tidak menawarkan dukungan untuk perangkat lunak ini. Bagian sebelumnya tidak memengaruhi jaminan dan hak hukum mengenai produk TP Vision Netherlands B.V. yang Anda beli. Hal itu hanya berlaku pada kode sumber ini, yang disediakan untuk Anda. 74

75 THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software". We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. libpngex (1.4.1) libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a platform-independent library that contains C functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original download site for this software is : license libfreetypeex (2.4.2) FreeType is a software development library, available in source and binary forms, used to render text on to bitmaps and provides support for other font-related operations. The original download site for this software is : Freetype License dvbsnoop (1.2) dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program. For generating CRC32 values required for composing PAT, PMT, EIT sections The original download site for this software is : oop/blob/master/src/misc/crc32.cgpl v2 libjpegex (8a) This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is copyright (C) , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you gsoap (2.7.15) The gsoap toolkit is an open source C and C++ software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web services and generic (non-soap) C/C++ XML data bindings. Part of the software embedded in this product is gsoap software. Portions created by gsoap are Copyright Robert A. van Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 75

76 restlet (2.3.0) is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source REST framework for the Java platform. Restlet is suitable for both server and client Web applications. It supports major Internet transport, data format, and service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS, SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2. live555 (0.82) Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client.the original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below. dnsmasq FaceBook SDK (3.0.1) Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS forwarder and DHCP server. The original download site for this software is : dnmasq This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK for Android is the easiest way to integrate your Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK provides support for Login with Facebook authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs and support for UI elements such as pickers and dialogs. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2. TomCrypt (1.1) iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption. The original download site for this software is : 3/libtomcrypt.3.html This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the DO WHAT THE FUCK YOU WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE. ffmpeg (2.1.3) This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, crossplatform solution to record, convert and stream audio and video. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. u-boot ( ) U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application code. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can be found below. gson (2.3) This TV uses gson. Gson is a Java library that can be used to convert Java Objects into their JSON representation. It can also be used to convert a JSON string to an equivalent Java object. Gson can work with arbitrary Java objects including pre-existing objects that you do not have source-code of. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache License 2.0 AsyncHttpclient (1.4.9) The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 This software includes an implementation of the AES Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is licensed by Brian Gladman. httpclient ( ) This is needed to import cz.msebera.android.httpclient used by AssyncHttpClientThe original download site for this software is : d/httpclient/ This piece of software is made libupnp (1.2.1) The original download site for this software is : This piece of software 76

77 available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2. which can be found below Jackson Parser (2.x) libjpeg (3.4.0) Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string manipulation. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 libjpeg-turbo is a JPEG image codec that uses SIMD instructions (MMX, SSE2, NEON) to accelerate baseline JPEG compression and decompression on x86, x86-64, and ARM systems. The original download site for this software is : is covered by three compatible BSD-style open source licenses. Refer to LICENSE.txt for a roll-up of license terms. audio a2dp (2.x) Bluetooth stack. The original download site for this software is : bt This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 libmtp (1.0.1) libmtp The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the LGPL V2. libexif (0.6.21) libmdnssd ( ) Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 MDNS Responder. The mdnsresponder project is a component of Bonjour, 5Apple's ease-of-use IP networking initiative. The original download site for this software is : sponder/ This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2 libexpat (2.1.0) Expat XML Parser. The original download site for this software is : is free software. You may copy, distribute, and modify it under the terms of the License contained in the file COPYING distributed with this package. This license is the same as the MIT/X Consortium license. libnfc_ndef ( ) The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Apache license version 2 libfftem ( ) neven face recognition library. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0 libskia ( ) skia 2D graphics library Skia is a complete 2D graphic library for drawing Text, Geometries, and Images. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libicui18n (49.1.1) International Components for unicode. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libsonivox ( ) The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libiprouteutil (3.4.0) iproute2 TCP/IP networking and traffic control. The original download site for this software is 77

78 libsqlite (3.9.2) : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. SQLite database. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libssl (7b8b9c17db93ea b437c77fb36eeb81b31) libttspico ( ) BoringSSL The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2. libopenmaxal (7b8b9c17db93ea b437c77fb36eeb81b31) libtinyalsa ( ) tinyalsa: a small library to interface with ALSA in the Linux kernel. The original download site for this software is : No info. This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. OpenMAX AL is an application-level multimedia playback and recording API for mobile embedded devicesthe original download site for this software is : License free wpa_supplicant (0.8) libopensles (1.0) Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant daemon. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPLv2. Khronos OpenSL Sound API spec. The original download site for this software is : License free libegl libglesv1_cm (3.1) libz (1.2.8) Khronos OpenGL Graphics API spec. The original download site for this software is : License free zlib compression library. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD. libffmpeg_av (2.1) FFmpeg media player. The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is licensed under LGPL v2.1 iptables (1.4.20) iptables is a user space application program that allows a system administrator to configure the tables provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it stores. Different kernel modules and programs are currently used for different protocols; iptables applies to IPv4The original download site for this software is : This piece of software is made available under the terms and conditions of the GPLv2. libcurlmheg (7.21.6) curl for MHEG. The original download site for this software is : Curl and libcurl are licensed under a MIT/X derivate license. Please look at boringssl (af0e32cb84f0c9cc65b9233a3414d b342) toolbox (1.2.8) ssl for MHEG, Taken from android M. The original download site for this software is : Licensed under BSD, please find in /android/nbase/external/boringssl/notice The 'toolbox' command in Android is a multi-function program. It encapsulates the functionality of many common Linux commands (and some special Android ones) into a single binary. This makes it more compact than having all those other commands installed individually. The original download site for this software is libpng (1.6.22beta) 78

79 libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG) reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a platform-independent library that contains C functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original download site for this software is : This code is released under the libpng license. Robin Dunn, Ronald Tschalär, Samuel Weinig, Simon Hausmann, Staikos Computing Services Inc., Stefan Schimanski, Symantec Corporation, The Dojo Foundation, The Karbon Developers, Thomas Boyer, Tim Copperfield, Tobias Anton, Torben Weis, Trolltech, University of Cambridge, Vaclav Slavik, Waldo Bastian, Xan Lopez, Zack Rusin Hue SDK (1.8.1) Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: The terms and conditions vary from file to file, but are one of: TV ambihue app uses Philips SDK to find the hue bridge name. The original download site for this software is : a-multi-platform-and-android-sdk OR Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Opera Web Browser (SDK 4.8.0) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER, INC. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER, INC. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This TV contains Opera Browser Software. Third-party licenses WebKit name License WebKit URL: (WebKit doesn't distribute an explicit license. This LICENSE is derived from license text in the source.) Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Alexander Kellett, Alexey Proskuryakov, Alex Mathews, Allan Sandfeld Jensen, Alp Toker, Anders Carlsson, Andrew Wellington, Antti Koivisto, Apple Inc., Arthur Langereis, Baron Schwartz, Bjoern Graf, Brent Fulgham, Cameron Zwarich, Charles Samuels, Christian Dywan, Collabora Ltd., Cyrus Patel, Daniel Molkentin, Dave Maclachlan, David Smith, Dawit Alemayehu, Dirk Mueller, Dirk Schulze, Don Gibson, Enrico Ros, Eric Seidel, Frederik Holljen, Frerich Raabe, Friedmann Kleint, George Staikos, Google Inc., Graham Dennis, Harri Porten, Henry Mason, Hiroyuki Ikezoe, Holger Hans Peter Freyther, IBM, James G. Speth, Jan Alonzo, Jean-Loup Gailly, John Reis, Jonas Witt, Jon Shier, Jonas Witt, Julien Chaffraix, Justin Haygood, Kevin Ollivier, Kevin Watters, Kimmo Kinnunen, Kouhei Sutou, Krzysztof Kowalczyk, Lars Knoll, Luca Bruno, Maks Orlovich, Malte Starostik, Mark Adler, Martin Jones, Marvin Decker, Matt Lilek, Michael Emmel, Mitz Pettel, mozilla.org, Netscape Communications Corporation, Nicholas Shanks, Nikolas Zimmermann, Nokia, Oliver Hunt, Opened Hand, Paul Johnston, Peter Kelly, Pioneer Research Center USA, Rich Moore, Rob Buis, GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Library General Public License, 79

80 applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too. usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster development of free libraries. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the library. Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special one. GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license. A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we 80

81 under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the squareroot function must still compute square roots.) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associate interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains If distribution of object code is made by offering 81

82 access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whateve changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be 82

83 distributed under the terms of the Sections above. has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Library General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" 83

84 WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble 84

85 Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in nonfree programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided GNU LESSER GENERAL 85

86 that you also meet all of these conditions: specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. a) The modified work must itself be a software library. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent noticesstating that you changed the files and the date of any change. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables 86

87 containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer syste rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that 87

88 the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY 88

89 YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS -Other name License Chromium URL: The following files are distributed under the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: chromium-nss.h Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. chromium-blapi.h Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: chromium-blapit.h chromium-sha256.h chromium-prtypes.h Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. The following files contain portions distributed under the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license: Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom ain.cc copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom ain.h in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the The following files are distributed under the MPL 2.0 license: Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Fontconfig URL: this software without specific prior written permission. Copyright 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007 Keith Packard THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Copyright 2005 Patrick Lam "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Copyright 2009 Roozbeh Pournader Copyright 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Copyright 2008 Danilo Šegan A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, copyright notice and this permission notice appear in DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) 89

90 supporting Throughout this License, "Font" means the TrueType fonts "AR PL Mingti2L Big5", "AR PL KaitiM Big5" (BIG-5 character set) and "AR PL SungtiL GB", "AR PL KaitiM GB" (GB character set) which are originally distributed by Arphic, and the derivatives of those fonts created through any modification including modifying glyph, reordering glyph, converting format, changing font name, or adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table. documentation, and that the name of the author(s) not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. The authors make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It "PL" means "Public License". "Copyright Holder" means whoever is named in the copyright or copyrights for the Font. is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. "You" means the licensee, or person copying, redistributing or modifying the Font. THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, "Freely Available" means that you have the freedom to copy or modify the Font as well as redistribute copies of the Font under the same conditions you received, not price. If you wish, you can charge for this service. INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of this Font in any medium, without restriction, provided that you retain this license file (ARPHICPL.TXT) unaltered in all copies. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER You may otherwise modify your copy of this Font in any way, including modifying glyph, reordering glyph, converting format, changing font name, or adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table, and copy and distribute such modifications under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that the following conditions are met: TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Arphic fonts a) You must insert a prominent notice in each modified file stating how and when you changed that file. URL: nts/download b) You must make such modifications Freely Available as a whole to all third parties under the terms of this License, such as by offering access to copy the modifications from a designated place, or distributing the modifications on a medium customarily used for software interchange. ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE Copyright (C) 1999 Arphic Technology Co., Ltd. All rights reserved except as specified below. c) If the modified fonts normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the Font under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is forbidden. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE specifically permits and encourages you to use this software, provided that you give the recipients all the rights that we gave you and make sure they can get the modifications of this software. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Font, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. Therefore, mere aggregation of Legal Terms 90

91 another work not based on the Font with the Font on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE FONT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE FONT PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Font except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Font will automatically retroactively void your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will keep their licenses valid so long as such parties remain in full compliance. UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING, IN NO EVENT WILL ANY COPYRIGHTT HOLDERS, OR OTHER PARTIES WHO MAY COPY, MODIFY OR REDISTRIBUTE THE FONT AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Font. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by copying, modifying, sublicensing or distributing the Font, you indicate your acceptance of this License and all its terms and conditions. Each time you redistribute the Font, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Font subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Bitstream Vera fonts URL: _Fonts Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright The fonts have a generous copyright, allowing derivative works (as long as "Bitstream" or "Vera" are not in the names), and full redistribution (so long as they are not sold by themselves). They can be be bundled, redistributed and sold with any software. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Font at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Font by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Font. The fonts are distributed under the following copyright: Copyright ========= Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying this license ("Fonts") and associated If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. documentation files (the "Font Software"), to reproduce and distribute the Font Software, including without limitation the rights to use, BECAUSE THE FONT IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE FONT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE FONT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Font Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: 91

92 The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice Software without prior written authorization from the Gnome Foundation shall be included in all copies of one or more of the Font Software or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information, contact: The Font Software may be modified, altered, or added to, and in fonts at gnome dot org. particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be Copyright FAQ ============= modified and additional glyphs or characters may be added to the 1. I don't understand the resale restriction... What gives? Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not containing either Bitstream is giving away these fonts, but wishes to ensure its the words "Bitstream" or the word "Vera". competitors can't just drop the fonts as is into a font sale system This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts and sell them as is. It seems fair that if Bitstream can't make money or Font Software that has been modified and is distributed under the from the Bitstream Vera fonts, their competitors should not be able to "Bitstream Vera" names. The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger software package but do so either. You can sell the fonts as part of any software package, no copy of one or more of the Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself. however. 2. I want to package these fonts separately for distribution and THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, sale as part of a larger software package or system. Can I do so? EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF Yes. A RPM or Debian package is a "larger software package" to begin MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT with, and you aren't selling them independently by themselves. OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL See 1. above. BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR 3. Are derivative works allowed? OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, Yes! OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR 4. Can I change or add to the font(s)? OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT Yes, but you must change the name(s) of the font(s). SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. 5. Under what terms are derivative works allowed? Except as contained in this notice, the names of Gnome, the Gnome You must change the name(s) of the fonts. This is to ensure the Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in advertising or quality of the fonts, both to protect Bitstream and Gnome. We want to otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Font ensure that if an application has opened a font specifically of these 92

93 names, it gets what it expects (though of course, using fontconfig, use fontconfig (see to handle font configuration, substitutions could still could have occurred during font selection and substitution; it has provisions for overriding font opening). You must include the Bitstream copyright. Additional names and subsituting alternatives. An example is provided by the copyrights can be added, as per copyright law. Happy Font Hacking! supplied local.conf file, which chooses the family Bitstream Vera for "sans", "serif" and "monospace". Other software (e.g., the XFree86 6. If I have improvements for Bitstream Vera, is it possible they might get core server) has other mechanisms for font substitution. adopted in future versions? Yes. The contract between the Gnome Foundation and Bitstream has Open Sans fonts provisions for working with Bitstream to ensure quality additions to URL: the Bitstream Vera font family. Please contact us if you have such additions. Note, that in general, we will want such additions for the License for Open Sans Font Family entire family, not just a single font, and that you'll have to keep Apache License both Gnome and Jim Lyles, Vera's designer, happy! To make sense to add January 2004 Version 2.0, glyphs to the font, they must be stylistically in keeping with Vera's design. Vera cannot become a "ransom note" font. Jim Lyles will be TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION providing a document describing the design elements used in Vera, as a 1. Definitions. guide and aid for people interested in contributing to Vera. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, 7. I want to sell a software package that uses these fonts: Can I do so? and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. Sure. Bundle the fonts with your software and sell your software "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by with the fonts. That is the intent of the copyright. the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all 8. If applications have built the names "Bitstream Vera" into them, other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common can I override this somehow to use fonts of my choosing? control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, This depends on exact details of the software. Most open source "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the systems and software (e.g., Gnome, KDE, etc.) are now converting to direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or 93

94 otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent exercising permissions granted by this License. to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, including but not limited to software source code, documentation and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the source, and configuration files. Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise transformation or translation of a Source form, including but designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity and conversions to other media types. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a subsequently incorporated within the Work. copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of (an example is provided in the Appendix below). this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of the Work and Derivative Works thereof. this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner where such license applies only to those 94

95 patent claims licensable attribution notices contained by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed institute patent litigation against any entity (including a as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and as of the date such litigation is filed. do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You as modifying the License. meet the following conditions: You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and (a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or may provide additional or different license terms and conditions Derivative Works a copy of this License; and for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or (b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, stating that You changed the files; and (c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and the conditions stated in this License. attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work the Derivative Works; and by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its this License, without any additional terms or conditions. distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein include a readable copy of the 95

96 shall supersede or modify loss of goodwill, the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all with Licensor regarding such Contributions. other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]" unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier Work (including but not limited to damages for 96

97 identification within third-party archives. There is no limitation and the below description is not applied as for in order not to reuse as font (ex: font is embeded to documents). Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); Copyright (c) Wada Laboratory, the University of Tokyo. you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. Copyright (c) Electronic Font Open Laboratory (/efont/). You may obtain a copy of the License at Copyright (C) M+ FONTS PROJECT Copyright (C) Daisuke SUZUKI <daisuke@vinelinux.org>. Copyright (C) Project Vine <Vine@vinelinux.org>. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software All rights reserved. distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions See the License for the specific language governing permissions and are met: this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. limitations under the License. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation VL Gothic fonts and/or other materials provided with the distribution. URL: License for VLGothic Font Family the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products This font includes glyphs derived from M+ FONTS which is created by derived from this software without specific prior written permission. M+ FONTS PROJECT. License for M+ FONTS part is described in M+ FONTS PROJECT's license. See attached 'LICENSE_E.mplus'. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WADA LABORATORY, THE UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO AND This font also includes glyphs derived from Sazanami Gothic font which CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT is created by Electronic Font Open Laboratory (/efont/). License for NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A Sazanami Gothic part is described in it's license. See attached PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LABORATORY OR 'README.sazanami' for original Sazanami Gothic font license. CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, This font also includes original glyphs which is created by Daisuke EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, SUZUKI and Project Vine based on M+ FONTS. Licese for VL Gothic PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; original glyphs is same as M+ FONTS PROJECT's license. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR 97

98 TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF DEFINITIONS ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. "Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation. Nanum fonts URL: "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s). Copyright (c) 2010, NAVER Corporation ( "Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s). with Reserved Font Name Nanum, Naver Nanum, NanumGothic, Naver NanumGothic, NanumMyeongjo, Naver NanumMyeongjo, NanumBrush, Naver NanumBrush, NanumPen, Naver NanumPen, Naver NanumGothicEco, NanumGothicEco, Naver NanumMyeongjoEco, NanumMyeongjoEco, Naver NanumGothicLight, NanumGothicLight, NanumBarunGothic, Naver NanumBarunGothic, "Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment. "Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software. This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. PERMISSION & CONDITIONS This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions: ) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version February 2007 in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself ) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy PREAMBLE The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, humanreadable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user. 3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted 98

99 by the corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as Mini-XML URL: presented to the users. Mini-XML License 4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font The Mini-XML library and included programs are provided under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License version 2 (LGPL2) with the following exceptions: Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the If you link the application to a modified version of Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be provided under the terms of the LGPL2 in sections 1, 2, and 4. Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, Version 2, June 1991 must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA , USA distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software. [This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.] TERMINATION This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. not met. DISCLAIMER THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. 99

100 For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. intended to permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster development of free libraries. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the libary" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the library. Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather than by this special one. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary license. "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. a) The modified work must itself be a software library. However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. 100

101 c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with 101

102 d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. NO WARRANTY END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does. Copyright (C) year name of author b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That's all there is to it! Boost URL: Boost Software License - Version August 17th, 102

103 2003 software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, do so, all subject to the following: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor. libcurl - lib/krb5.c URL: THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR / GSSAPI/krb5 support for FTP - loosely based on old krb4.c IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, Copyright (c) Daniel Stenberg ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER All rights reserved. DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without libcurl modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions URL: are met: COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) , Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this 103 notice, this list of conditions and the following

104 disclaimer. It has since been patched and modified a lot by Daniel Stenberg <daniel@haxx.se> to make it better applied to curl conditions, and to make 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright it not use globals, pollute name space and more. This source code awaits a notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the rewrite to work around the paragraph 2 in the BSD licenses as explained documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. below. 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). without specific prior written permission. Copyright (C) , Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>, et al. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE All rights reserved. IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL are met: DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the SUCH DAMAGE. / documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. libcurl - lib/security.c URL: rity.c 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software / This source code was modified by Martin Hedenfalk <mhe@stacken.kth.se> for without specific prior written permission. use in Curl. His latest changes were done THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, 104

105 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE / ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE dynamic annotations FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL URL: DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS / Copyright (c) , Google Inc. All rights reserved. OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF met: SUCH DAMAGE. / Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright David M. Gay's floating point routines notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. URL: Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its / contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from The author of this software is David M. Gay. this software without specific prior written permission. Copyright (c) 1991, 2000, 2001 by Lucent Technologies. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that this entire notice LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation for such software. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR LUCENT MAKES ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 105

106 OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF --- THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Author: Kostya Serebryany / ============================== libevent URL: Portions of Libevent are based on works by others, also made available by Libevent is available for use under the following license, commonly known them under the three-clause BSD license above. The copyright notices are as the 3-clause (or "modified") BSD license: available in the corresponding source files; the license is as above. Here's ============================== a list: Copyright (c) Niels Provos <provos@citi.umich.edu> Copyright (c) 2000 Dug Song <dugsong@monkey.org> Copyright (c) Niels Provos and Nick Mathewson Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com> modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions Copyright (c) 2003 Michael A. Davis <mike@datanerds.net> Copyright (c) 2007 Sun Microsystems are met: notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright (c) 2006 Maxim Yegorushkin <maxim.yegorushkin@gmail.com> notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the Copyright 2002 Niels Provos <provos@citi.umich.edu> documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) derived from this software without specific prior written permission. URL: / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License 106

107 for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, License. are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: The Original Code is the Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR). Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this The Initial Developer of the Original Code is list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Netscape Communications Corporation. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. other materials provided with the distribution. Contributor(s): Neither my name, Paul Hsieh, nor the names of any other contributors to the Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of code use may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or software without specific prior written permission. the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. END LICENSE BLOCK / google-glog's symbolization library URL: Paul Hsieh's SuperFastHash Copyright (c) 2006, Google Inc. URL: All rights reserved. Paul Hsieh OLD BSD license Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Copyright (c) 2010, Paul Hsieh All rights reserved. 107

108 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright (C) Julian Seward. All rights reserved. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT 2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation would be appreciated but is not required. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT 3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, not be misrepresented as being the original software. DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT products derived from this software without specific prior written (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE permission. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED valgrind URL: WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Notice that the following BSD-style license applies to the Valgrind header ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY files used by Chromium (valgrind.h and memcheck.h). However, the rest of DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL Valgrind is licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS version 2, unless otherwise indicated. INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING 108

109 NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your Mozilla Personal Security Manager decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice URL: and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with END LICENSE BLOCK / the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at Network Security Services (NSS) URL: Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version License. 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 2000 WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s): for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead 109

110 the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. Neither the name of TransGaming Inc., Google Inc., 3DLabs Inc. Ltd., nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Contributor(s): END LICENSE BLOCK / boringssl URL: open-vcdiff URL: LICENSE ISSUES ============== Almost Native Graphics Layer Engine The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of URL: Copyright (C) The ANGLE Project Authors. the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. All rights reserved. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. OpenSSL License Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution / ============================================== 110

111 ====================== retain the following Copyright (c) The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit ( modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY are met: EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; the documentation and/or other materials provided with the LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) distribution. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) software must display the following acknowledgment: ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. ( ============================================== ====================== 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young endorse or promote products derived from this software without (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim prior written permission. For written permission, please contact Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). openssl-core@openssl.org. / 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" Original SSLeay License nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. / Copyright (C) Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must All rights reserved. 111

112 This package is an SSL implementation written "This product includes cryptographic software written by by Eric Young The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. must display the following acknowledgement: Eric Young The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library This library is free for commercial and noncommercial use as long as being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE the code are not to be removed. FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions SUCH DAMAGE. are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the / documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Brotli 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software URL: 112

113 Google Cache Invalidation API MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR URL: /master/third_party/cacheinvalidation/readme.chro mium A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Crashpad URL: LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, drawelements Quality Program DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY URL: html THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE dom-distiller-js OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. URL: Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. Parts of the following directories are available under Apache v2.0 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are src/de Copyright (c) Christian Kohlschütter met: third_party/gwt_exporter Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright Copyright 2007 Timepedia.org notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. third_party/gwt Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Copyright 2008 Google copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer java/org/chromium/distiller/dev in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the Copyright 2008 Google Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its Apache License contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Version 2.0, January 2004 this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 113

114 Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution." "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. "Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. "Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and "You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and "Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. "Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below). "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. "Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative 114

115 END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Expat XML Parser Adel I. Mirzazhanov. All rights reserved URL: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions and Clark Cooper are met: Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers. 1.Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the 2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to 3.The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to derived from this software without specific prior written permission. the following conditions: THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. fips181 URL: 115

116 PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF flac LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING URL: NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007 Josh Coalson SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. harfbuzz-ng Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without URL: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions HarfBuzz is licensed under the so-called "Old MIT" license. Details follow. are met: For parts of HarfBuzz that are licensed under different licenses see individual - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright files names COPYING in subdirectories where applicable. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright Copyright 2012 Mozilla Foundation Copyright 2011 Codethink Limited notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the Copyright 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Copyright 2009 Keith Stribley Copyright 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL International - Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its Copyright 2007 Chris Wilson Copyright 2006 Behdad Esfahbod contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from Copyright 2005 David Turner Copyright 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, Inc. this software without specific prior written permission. Copyright David Turner and Werner Lemberg THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT For full copyright notices consult the individual files in the package. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and distribute this EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR above copyright notice and the following two 116

117 paragraphs appear in and no-warranty notice all copies of this software. unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN the Independent JPEG Group". IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS. acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name iccjpeg URL: in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, software". with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. This software is copyright (C) , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. icu URL: Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this ICU License - ICU and later software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE conditions: (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this Copyright (c) International Business Machines Corporation and README file must be included, with this copyright 117

118 others All rights reserved. All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a property of their respective owners. copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including Third-Party Software Licenses without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, This section contains third-party software notices and/or additional distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to terms for licensed third-party software components included within ICU whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided that the above libraries. copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of 1. Unicode Data Files and Software the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Copyright Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS Distributed under the Terms of Use in OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. or Software are furnished to do so, provided that Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall (a) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or of the Data Files or Software, (b) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of documentation, and the copyright holder. 118

119 (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifi as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or cation, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, th ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE is list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, prior written permission. DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, ECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDIN use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, written authorization of the copyright holder. DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF L 2. Chinese/Japanese Word Break Dictionary Data (cjdict.txt) IABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED O The Google Chrome software developed by Google is licensed under the BSD li F THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ses, as set forth below. The BSD License The word list in cjdict.txt are generated by combining three word lists l isted Copyright (C) , Google Inc. below with further processing for compound word breaking. The frequency i s generated All rights reserved. 119 with an iterative training against Google

120 web corpora. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Libtabe (Chinese) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS - Its license terms and conditions are shown below. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE IPADIC (Japanese) REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, - INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES - Its license terms and conditions are shown below. (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) COPYING.libtabe ---BEGIN HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, / Copyrighy (c) 1999 TaBE Project. Copyright (c) 1999 Pai-Hsiang Hsiao. All rights reserved. STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Copyright (c) 1999 Computer Systems and Communication Lab, / / Institute of Information Science, Academia Sinica.. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright All rights reserved. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions the documentation and/or other materials provided with the are met:. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright distribution.. Neither the name of the TaBE Project nor the names of its notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright from this software without specific prior written permission. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in 120

121 the documentation and/or other materials provided with the COPYING.ipadic-----BEGI N distribution.. Neither the name of the Computer Systems and Communication Lab Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Nara Institute of Science nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or and Technology. All Rights Reserved. promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. Use, reproduction, and distribution of this software is permitted. Any copy of this software, whether in its original form or modified, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS must include both the above copyright notice and the following "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS Nara Institute of Science and Technology (NAIST), FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE the copyright holders, disclaims all warranties with regard to this REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, software, including all implied warranties of merchantability and INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR fitness, in no event shall NAIST be liable for any special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether in an HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, action of contract, negligence or other tortuous action, arising out STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) of or in connection with the use or performance of this software. ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. paragraphs. A large portion of the dictionary entries originate from ICOT Free Software. The following conditions for ICOT / Free Software applies to the current dictionary as well. Copyright 1996 Chih-Hao Beckman Institute, University of Illinois c-tsai4@uiuc.edu Each User may also freely distribute the Program, whether in its original form or modified, to any third party or parties, PROVIDED COPYING.libtabe-----END that the provisions of Section 3 ("NO WARRANTY") will ALWAYS appear - on, or be attached to, the Program, which is distributed substantially 121 in the same form as set out herein and that

122 such intended or otherwise in connection distribution, if actually made, will neither violate or otherwise with the use or inability to use the program or any product, material contravene any of the laws and regulations of the countries having or result produced or otherwise obtained by using the program, jurisdiction over the User or the intended distribution itself. regardless of whether they have been advised of, or otherwise had knowledge of, the possibility of such damages at any time during the NO WARRANTY project or thereafter. Each user will be deemed to have agreed to the The program was produced on an experimental basis in the course of the foregoing by his or her commencement of use of the program. The term research and development conducted during the project and is provided "use" as used herein includes, but is not limited to, the use, to users as so produced on an experimental basis. Accordingly, the modification, copying and distribution of the program and the program is provided without any warranty whatsoever, whether express, production of secondary products from the program. implied, statutory or otherwise. The term "warranty" used herein In the case where the program, whether in its original form or includes, but is not limited to, any warranty of the quality, modified, was distributed or delivered to or received by a user from performance, merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose of any person, organization or entity other than ICOT, unless it makes or the program and the nonexistence of any infringement or violation of grants independently of ICOT any specific warranty to the user in any right of any third party. writing, such person, organization or entity, will also be exempted Each user of the program will agree and understand, and be deemed to from and not be held liable to the user for any such damages as noted have agreed and understood, that there is no warranty whatsoever for the program and, accordingly, the entire risk arising from or above as far as the program is concerned COPYING.ipadic-----END otherwise connected with the program is assumed by the user. 3. Lao Word Break Dictionary Data (laodict.txt) Therefore, neither ICOT, the copyright holder, or any other organization that participated in or was otherwise related to the Copyright (c) 2013 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved. development of the program and their respective officials, directors, Project: officers and other employees shall be held liable for any and all Dictionary: damages, including, without limitation, general, special, incidental License: it/lao-dictionary-licen (copied below) and consequential damages, arising out of 122

123 This file is derived from the above dictionary, with slight modifications. This list is part of a project hosted at: github.com/kanyawtech/myanmar-karen-word-lists Copyright (C) 2013 Brian Eugene Wilson, Robert Martin Campbell. Copyright (c) 2013, LeRoy Benjamin Sharon All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifi Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright no cation, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of cond this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notic itions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materi e, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation an als provided with the distribution. d/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name Myanmar Karen Word Lists, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 4. Burmese Word Break Dictionary Data (burmesedict.txt) Copyright (c) 2014 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved. 5. Time Zone Database 123

124 copy of this software and/or associated documentation files (the ICU uses the public domain data and code derived from Time Zone Database "Materials"), to deal in the Materials without restriction, including for its time zone support. The ownership of the TZ database is explained without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, in BCP 175: Procedure for Maintaining the Time Zone Database section 7. distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Materials, and to permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so, subject to 1 - Database Ownership the following conditions: The TZ database itself is not an IETF Contribution or an IETF The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included document. Rather it is a pre-existing and regularly updated work in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials. that is in the public domain, and is intended to remain in the public domain. Therefore, BCPs 78 [RFC5378] and 79 [RFC3979] do not apply THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, to the TZ Database or contributions that individuals make to it. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF Should any claims be made and substantiated against the TZ Database, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. the organization that is providing the IANA Considerations defined in IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY this RFC, under the memorandum of understanding with the IETF, CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, currently ICANN, may act in accordance with all competent court TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE orders. No ownership claims will be made by ICANN or the IETF Trust MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS. on the database or the code. Any person making a contribution to the database or code waives all rights to future claims in that SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) contribution or in the TZ Database. Copyright (C) 1992 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. google-jstemplate URL: Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of Khronos header files this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in URL: the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to Copyright (c) The Khronos Group Inc. use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do 124

125 so, subject to the following conditions: the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the this permission notice or a reference to Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Graphics, Inc. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE LevelDB: A Fast Persistent Key-Value Store URL: OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright (c) 2011 The LevelDB Authors. All rights reserved. The library to input, validate, and display addresses. URL: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are libjingle URL: met: libjpeg Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright URL: notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce 125

126 products derived from it. The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or software". fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy. commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. This software is copyright (C) , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below. sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these that you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for conditions: full details.) (1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit you more than README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice the foregoing paragraphs do. unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of The same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, the Independent JPEG Group". ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is copyright (3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable. full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind. patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. acknowledge us. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it.) in advertising or publicity relating to this software or So far as we are aware, there are no patent 126

127 restrictions on the remaining above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. and/or other materials provided with the distribution. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has - Neither the name of the libjpeg-turbo Project nor the names of its been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this "uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the software without specific prior written permission. resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", GIF decoders. AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE We are required to state that IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CompuServe Incorporated." CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN Public License. CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) libjpeg-turbo ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE URL: POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. libjpeg-turbo is licensed under a non-restrictive, BSDstyle license International Phone Number Library (see README.) The TurboJPEG/OSS wrapper (both C and Java versions) and URL: associated test programs bear a similar license, which is reproduced below: Copyright (C) 2011 Google Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the 127

128 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes See the License for the specific language governing permissions and or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire limitations under the License. risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with libpng the user. URL: libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of Copyright (c) Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are derived from any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is libpng-0.96, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: of Contributing Authors: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following Tom Lane Glenn Randers-Pehrson this sentence. Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are This code is released under the libpng license. Copyright (c) Andreas Dilger, are derived from libpng-0.88, libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through , November 12, 2015, are and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as Copyright (c) , 2004, Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of derived from libpng-1.0.6, and are distributed according to the same Contributing Authors: disclaimer and license as libpng with the following individuals John Bowler added to the list of Contributing Authors: Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Simon-Pierre Cadieux Magnus Holmgren Eric S. Raymond Greg Roelofs Cosmin Truta Tom Tanner Gilles Vollant libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are and with the following additions to the disclaimer: 128

129 Copyright (c) Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this is defined as the following set of individuals: source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to Andreas Dilger END OF COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE. Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" Tim Wegner boxes and the like: The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors printf("%s", png_get_copyright(null)); and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31). fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. OSI has not addressed Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. the additional disclaimers inserted at version Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users.sourceforge.net source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject November 12, 2015 to the following restrictions: libsrtp URL: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. / 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not Copyright (c) Cisco Systems, Inc. be misrepresented as being the original source. All rights reserved. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without source or altered source distribution. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. 129

130 libusbx Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright URL: notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. libvpx URL: Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All rights reserved. copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without with the distribution. modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright from this software without specific prior written permission. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, Neither the name of Google, nor the WebM Project, nor the names INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR derived from this software without specific prior written SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) permission. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT / HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, 130

131 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT or any code incorporated within any of these implementations of WebM LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, constitute direct or contributory patent infringement, or inducement of DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY patent infringement, then any patent rights granted to you under this License THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT for these implementations of WebM shall terminate as of the date such (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE litigation is filed. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. libxml URL: Except where otherwise noted in the source code (e.g. the files hash.c, WebP image encoder/decoder URL: with different Copyright notices) all the files are: Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents) Copyright (C) Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. "These implementations" means the copyrightable works that implement the WebM Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy codecs distributed by Google as part of the WebM Project. of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights Google hereby grants to you a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, transfer, and otherwise nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: run, modify and propagate the contents of these implementations of WebM, where The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in such license applies only to those patent claims, both currently owned by all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Google and acquired in the future, licensable by Google that are necessarily THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR infringed by these implementations of WebM. This grant does not include claims IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of these NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE or agree to the institution of patent litigation or any other patent AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER enforcement activity against any entity (including a cross-claim or LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any of these implementations of WebM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE 131

132 OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE libxslt Licence for libexslt URL: Licence for libxslt except libexslt Copyright (C) Thomas Broyer, Charlie Bozeman and Daniel Veillard All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur- nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT- NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of the authors shall not Except as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him. ings in this Software without prior written authorization from him

133 DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT libyuv URL: (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE Copyright 2011 The LibYuv Project Authors. All rights reserved. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without linux-syscall-support URL: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: // Copyright 2015 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // // Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // met: // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in // Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright the documentation and/or other materials provided with the // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. distribution. // Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may // copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software // in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the without specific prior written permission. // distribution. // Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT // this software without specific prior written permission. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, // "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT // LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT 133

134 // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT // LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS // DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. // THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT LZMA SDK // (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE URL: LZMA SDK is placed in the public domain. // OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. mesa URL: LZ4 - Extremely fast compression URL: The default Mesa license is as follows: LZ4 Library Copyright (C) Brian Paul All Rights Reserved. Copyright (c) , Yann Collet All rights reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, list of conditions and the following disclaimer. and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included other materials provided with the distribution. in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; 134

135 AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Some parts of Mesa are copyrighted under the GNU LGPL. See the A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Mesa/docs/COPYRIGHT file for details. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, modp base64 decoder SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT URL: LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, MODP_B64 - High performance base64 encoder/decoder DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY Version Mar-2006 THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE Copyright (c) 2005, 2006 Nick Galbreath -- nickg [at] modp [dot] com OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Mojo URL: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are // Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights reserved. met: // Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are // met: Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the // Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. // notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above Neither the name of the modp.com nor the names of its // copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from // in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the this software without specific prior written permission. // distribution. // Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its 135

136 // contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions // this software without specific prior written permission. are met: // 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright // THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. // "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT // LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright // A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the // OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. // SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT 3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote // LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, products derived from this software without specific prior written // DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY permission. // THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT // (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS // OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR mt19937ar A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR URL: CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, A C-program for MT19937, with initialization improved 2002/1/26. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF Before using, initialize the state by using init_genrand(seed) LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING or init_by_array(init_key, key_length). NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS Copyright (C) , Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. All rights reserved. Netscape Plugin Application Programming Interface (NPAPI) Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without URL:

137 central/source/modules/plugin/base/public/ the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 OpenMAX DL URL: OX000-BU r1p0-00bet0/OX000-BU r1p0-00bet0.tgz The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at Use of this source code is governed by a BSD-style license that can be Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, found in the LICENSE file in the root of the source tree. All WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License contributing project authors may be found in the AUTHORS file in the for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the root of the source tree. The Original Code is mozilla.org code. The files were originally licensed by ARM Limited. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is The following files: Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 1998 dl/api/omxtypes.h dl/sp/api/omxsp.h the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. are licensed by Khronos: Contributor(s): Copyright The Khronos Group Inc. All Rights Reserved. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or These materials are protected by copyright laws and contain material the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), proprietary to the Khronos Group, Inc. You may use these materials in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead for implementing Khronos specifications, without altering or removing of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only any trademark, copyright or other notice from the specification. under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims any, representations use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your or warranties, express or implied, regarding these materials, including, decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete for a particular purpose or non-infringement of any intellectual property. the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under 137

138 Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims any, warranties, express - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the or implied, regarding the correctness, accuracy, completeness, timeliness, names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote and reliability of these materials. products derived from this software without specific prior written Under no circumstances will the Khronos Group, or any of its Promoters, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS Contributors or Members or their respective partners, officers, directors, ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT employees, agents or representatives be liable for any damages, whether LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR direct, indirect, special or consequential damages for lost revenues, A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER lost profits, or otherwise, arising from or in connection with these OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Khronos and OpenMAX are trademarks of the Khronos Group Inc. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR opus PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF URL: Copyright Xiph.Org, Skype Limited, Octasic, LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING Jean-Marc Valin, Timothy B. Terriberry, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS CSIRO, Gregory Maxwell, Mark Borgerding, SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Erik de Castro Lopo Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without Opus is subject to the royalty-free patent licenses which are modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions specified at: are met: Microsoft Corporation: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Broadcom Corporation: - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright OTS (OpenType Sanitizer) notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the URL: documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) URL: 138

139 PLY (Python Lex-Yacc) Version 3.4 OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Protocol Buffers URL: re2 - an efficient, principled regular expression library Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is owned by the owner URL: of the input file used when generating it. This code is not sfntly standalone and requires a support library to be linked with it. This URL: support library is itself covered by the above license. Skia URL: Quick Color Management System URL: qcms Some files under resources are under the following license: Copyright (C) 2009 Mozilla Corporation Copyright (C) Marti Maria Unlimited Commercial Use We try to make it clear that you may use all clipart from Openclipart even for unlimited commercial use. We believe that giving away our images is a great way to share with the world our talents and that will come back around in a better form. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation May I Use Openclipart for? the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, We put together a small chart of as many possibilities and questions we have heard from people asking how they may use Openclipart. If you have an additional question, please love@openclipart.org. and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: All Clipart are Released into the Public Domain. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in Each artist at Openclipart releases all rights to the images they share at Openclipart. The reason is so that there is no friction in using and sharing images authors make available at this website so that each artist might also receive the same benefit in using other artists clipart totally for any possible reason. all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SMHasher URL: THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND Snappy: A fast compressor/decompressor LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION URL: 139

140 BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. sqlite URL: The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of a legal notice, here is a blessing: May you do good and not evil. May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. May you share freely, never taking more than you give. tcmalloc URL: usrsctp URL: The USB ID Repository URL: (Copied from the COPYRIGHT file of Copyright (c) 2012, Linux USB Project All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Cisco Systems, Inc. Copyright (c) Randall R. Stewart Copyright (c) Michael Tuexen o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, All rights reserved. this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the are met: documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the o Neither the name of the Linux USB Project nor the names of its documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND 140

141 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT --- LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License used by X.org: OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. G wayland URL: wayland-protocols Copyright Kristian Høgsberg URL: Copyright Intel Corporation Copyright 2011 Benjamin Franzke Copyright Kristian Høgsberg Copyright 2012 Collabora, Ltd. Copyright Intel Corporation Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), Copyright 2013 Rafael Antognolli Copyright 2013 Jasper St. Pierre Copyright 2014 Jonas Ådahl Copyright 2014 Jason Ekstrand Copyright Collabora, Ltd. to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation Copyright 2015 the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, Red Hat Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation The above copyright notice and this permission notice (including the next the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, paragraph) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR The above copyright notice and this permission notice (including the next IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, 141

142 paragraph) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, the documentation and/or other materials provided with the FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL distribution. THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER without specific prior written permission. DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS --- "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License used by X.org: LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT G HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT Web Animations JS LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, URL: DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY WebRTC THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT URL: (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE Copyright (c) 2011, The WebRTC project authors. All rights reserved. OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without x86inc modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: URL: x86/x86inc.asm Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright ; notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. ; x86inc.asm ; 142

143 ; Copyright (C) x264 project ; purposes to add a new feature, we strongly encourage contributing a patch ; ; Authors: Loren Merritt <lorenm@u.washington.edu> ; as this feature might be useful for others as well. Send patches or ideas ; Anton Mitrofanov <BugMaster@narod.ru> ; to x264-devel@videolan.org. ; Jason Garrett-Glaser <darkshikari@gmail.com> zlib ; URL: ; Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any / zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library ; purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above version 1.2.4, March 14th, 2010 ; copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. Copyright (C) Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler ; ; THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied ; WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages ; MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR arising from the use of this software. ; ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES ; WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, ; ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: ; OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. ; 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software ; This is a header file for the x264asm assembly language, which uses in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be ; NASM/YASM syntax combined with a large number of macros to provide easy appreciated but is not required. ; abstraction between different calling conventions (x86_32, win64, linux64). 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be ; It also has various other useful features to simplify writing the kind of misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. ; DSP functions that are most often used in x264. ; Unlike the rest of x264, this file is available under an ISC license, as it Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler ; has significant usefulness outside of x264 and we want it to be available / ; to the largest audience possible. Of course, if you modify it for your own 143

144 THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE url_parse URL: ozilla/netwerk/base/src/nsurlparsers.cpp OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright 2007, Google Inc. All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without The file url_parse.cc is based on nsurlparsers.cc from Mozilla. This file is modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are licensed separately as follows: met: The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its The Original Code is mozilla.org code. contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from The Initial Developer of the Original Code is this software without specific prior written permission. Netscape Communications Corporation. Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) 1998 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Contributor(s): LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR Darin Fisher (original author) A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY of those above. If you wish to allow use of your 144

145 version of this file only assembler-mips.cc, assembler-mips.h, assembler.cc and assembler.h. under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to This code is copyrighted by Sun Microsystems Inc. and released use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your under a 3-clause BSD license. decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice - Valgrind client API header, located at third_party/valgrind/valgrind.h and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete This is release under the BSD license. the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under These libraries have their own licenses; we recommend you read them, the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. as their terms may differ from the terms below. V8 JavaScript Engine Further license information can be found in LICENSE files located in URL: sub-directories. This license applies to all parts of V8 that are not externally Copyright 2014, the V8 project authors. All rights reserved. maintained libraries. The externally maintained libraries used by V8 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without are: modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are - PCRE test suite, located in test/mjsunit/third_party/regexp-pcre/regexppcre.js. This is based on the met: test suite from PCRE-7.3, which is copyrighted by the University Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright of Cambridge and Google, Inc. The copyright notice and license notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. are embedded in regexp-pcre.js. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above - Layout tests, located in test/mjsunit/third_party/object-keys. These are copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following based on layout tests from webkit.org which are copyrighted by disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided Apple Computer, Inc. and released under a 3-clause BSD license. with the distribution. Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its - Strongtalk assembler, the basis of the files assembler-arm-inl.h, contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived assembler-arm.cc, assembler-arm.h, assembleria32-inl.h, from this software without specific prior written permission. assembler-ia32.cc, assembler-ia32.h, assemblerx64-inl.h, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS assembler-x64.cc, assembler-x64.h, assemblermips-inl.h, "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED 145

146 WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR - Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above copyright A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, - Neither the name of Sun Microsystems or the names of contributors may DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT specific prior written permission. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR fdlibm URL: PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR Copyright (C) by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved. CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Developed at SunSoft, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF software is freely granted, provided that this notice is preserved. LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING Strongtalk NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS URL: SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright (c) Sun Microsystems Inc. All Rights Reserved. Extra bundled binaries Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without name modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are libcap URL: License met: Unless otherwise explicitly stated, the following text describes the - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, licensed conditions under which the contents of this 146

147 libcap release OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND may be used and distributed: ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: libnsspem notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety, URL: including the disclaimer of warranties. / BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version with the distribution. 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License GNU General Public License (v2.0 - see below), in which case the for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. License. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained in a BSD-style The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Netscape Communications Corporation. WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Portions created by the Initial Developer are Copyright (C) MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, Contributor(s): INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, Rob Crittenden (rcritten@redhat.com) BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used 147

148 under the terms of either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or later (the "GPL"), or MIT LICENSE Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or later (the "LGPL"), a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL are applicable instead "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and not to allow others to distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to use your version of this file under the terms of the MPL, indicate your permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice the following conditions: and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL. If you do not delete The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the LGPL. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, END LICENSE BLOCK / EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF Return to Documentation index. Opera TV AS Confidential information of Opera TV. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY BSD LICENSE CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: 148

149 immediately following are this sentence. distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: This code is released under the libpng license. libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1, February 25, 2010, are Tom Lane Glenn Randers-Pehrson Copyright (c) 2004, Glenn RandersPehrson, and are Willem van Schaik distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, Cosmin Truta with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are John Bowler Kevin Bracey distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner Simon-Pierre Cadieux libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. and with the following additions to the disclaimer: For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the is defined as the following set of individuals: library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our Andreas Dilger efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes Dave Martindale or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire Guy Eric Schalnat risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with Tim Wegner Paul Schmidt the user. The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and 149

150 including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of glennrp at users.sourceforge.net February 25, 2010 fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG This software is based in part on the work of the FreeType Team. Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this LICENSE source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject The FreeType Project to the following restrictions: 2006-Jan-27 be misrepresented as being the original source. Copyright , 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg source or altered source distribution. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without Introduction fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to ============ supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" FreeType Project. boxes and the like: This license applies to all files found in such packages, and printf("%s",png_get_copyright(null)); which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31). documentation and makefiles, at the very least. Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products Glenn Randers-Pehrson 150

151 alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: Legal Terms =========== o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and full form, without having to pay us. (`royaltyfree' usage) Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source somewhere in your documentation that you have used the code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. FreeType code. (`credits') This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this engine'. software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. This license applies to all files distributed in the original We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus this license, you must contact us to verify this. encourage you to use the following text: The FreeType Project is copyright (C) by David Turner, """ Portions of this software are copyright ɠ<year> The FreeType Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as Project ( All rights reserved. specified below. """ Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY actually use. KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND 151

152 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR files. If you use PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO to us. USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use This license grants a worldwide, royaltyfree, perpetual and the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, purposes without specific prior written permission. display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. herein, subject to the following conditions: As you have not signed this license, you are not required to o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to material, only this license, or another one contracted with the the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType original files must be preserved in all copies of source Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms files. of this license. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: states that the software is based in part of the work of the o FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your freetype@nongnu.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as documentation, though this isn't mandatory. future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified 152

153 documentation. o a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic freetype-devel@nongnu.org transfer of data. Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, 1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source specific licenses, porting, etc. Code. Our home page can be found at 1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit --- end of FTL.TXT --- A "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version "License" means this document "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. Covered Code available to a third party "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to 1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the the creation of Modifications. substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous 1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications Modification is: A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file made by that particular Contributor. containing Original Code or previous Modifications "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or including portions thereof. previous Modifications "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means "Original Code" means Source Code of 153

154 computer software code than fifty percent which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this entity. License is not already Covered Code governed by this License The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, claims: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor. trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control as part of a Larger Work; and compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the Original Code (or portions thereof). appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available (c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are for no charge. effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity Original Code under the terms of this License. exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by combination of the Original Code with other software or devices. contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more 154

155 2.2. Contributor Grant. party modifications of Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, that Contributor. display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications 3.1. Application of License. created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation and/or as part of a Larger Work; and Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor an additional document offering the additional rights described in Version (or portions of such combination). Section Availability of Source Code. (c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License the Covered Code. either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) 3) for infringements caused by: i) third months after the date it initially became 155

156 available, or at least six and shall take other steps (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Code that new knowledge has been obtained. Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. (b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming 3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that also include this information in the LEGAL file. the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original (c) Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Representations. Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or origin or ownership of the Covered Code. Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters this License. (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's 3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to Contributor makes available thereafter 156

157 charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial terms You offer. Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the 3.7. Larger Works. Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. requirements of Section have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the understand it. Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code. License. If You distribute the Executable version 157

158 6.1. New Versions. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. will be given a distinguishing version number. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE 6.2. Effect of New Versions. IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate 6.3. Derivative Works. automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your shall survive. license (except to note that your license differs from this License) 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that: Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of (a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly this License.) infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License 158

159 shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, license. unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to prior to termination shall survive termination. the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY the 60 day notice period specified above. CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW Participant. PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE 8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version directly or THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent 48 C.F.R (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken terms are used in 48 C.F.R (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or C.F.R and 48 C.F.R through 159

160 (June 1995), distribute such all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or rights set forth herein. shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that the Initial unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A. any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflictof-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License. or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United ``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on License for the specific language governing rights and limitations Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. under the License. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract The Original Code is. shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is. Portions created by are Copyright (C) As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is. All Rights Reserved. responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to Contributor(s):. work with Initial Developer and Contributors to 160

161 Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the license (the "[ ] License"), in which case the provisions of [ ] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [ ] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [ ] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [ ] License." [NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.] 161

162 Cobalah cari tahu tentang sistem pengumpulan terpisah di tempat Anda untuk produk listrik dan elektronik. 22 Spesifikasi Patuhi peraturan setempat dan jangan membuang produk lama Anda bersamaan dengan limbah rumah tangga biasa. Pembuangan produk lama dengan benar membantu mencegah kemungkinan dampak negatif terhadap kesehatan lingkungan dan manusia Lingkungan Label Daya Eropa Produk Anda menggunakan baterai yang dicakup dalam European Directive 2006/66/EC, yang tidak boleh dibuang bersamaan dengan limbah rumah tangga biasa. Label Daya Eropa berisi informasi tentang kelas efisiensi daya produk ini. Semakin hijau kelas efisiensi daya produk ini, semakin rendah konsumsi dayanya. Pada label, Anda dapat menemukan kelas efisiensi daya, konsumsi daya rata-rata produk ini saat digunakan dan rata-rata konsumsi daya selama 1 tahun. Anda juga dapat menemukan nilai konsumsi daya produk ini di situs web Philips negara Anda di Cari tahu peraturan setempat tentang pengumpulan baterai secara terpisah karena membuang baterai dengan benar akan membantu mencegah kemungkinan dampak negatif terhadap kesehatan lingkungan dan manusia. Mikrofis Produk 55POS9002 Kelas Efisiensi Energi : B Ukuran Layar yang Terlihat : 139 cm / 55 inci Konsumsi Daya Mode Aktif (W) : 150 W Konsumsi Energi Tahunan (kwh) : 219 kwh Konsumsi Daya Siaga (W) : 0,30 W Resolusi Tampilan (Piksel) : 3840 x 2160p kwh konsumsi energi per tahun, berdasarkan konsumsi daya televisi yang beroperasi 4 jam per hari selama 365 hari. Konsumsi energi sebenarnya 22.2 Daya Spesifikasi produk bisa berubah tanpa pemberitahuan. Untuk detail spesifikasi produk ini selengkapnya, lihat Daya Daya listrik: AC V +/-10% Suhu Sekitar: 5 C hingga 35 C Fitur hemat daya: Mode ekonomis, Gambar diam (untuk radio), Timer nonaktifkan otomatis, Menu pengaturan ekonomis. tergantung pada bagaimana televisi digunakan. Ketika TV dimatikan dengan remote control dan tidak ada fungsi yang aktif. Untuk informasi konsumsi daya, lihat bab Mikrofis Produk. Akhir Penggunaan Peringkat daya yang tertera pada typeplate produk merupakan konsumsi daya produk ini selama penggunaan rumah tangga biasa (IEC Ed.2). Peringkat daya maksimum, yang tertera di antara tanda kurung, digunakan untuk keselamatan listrik (IEC Ed. 7.2). Pembuangan produk dan baterai lama Produk Anda dirancang dan diproduksi dengan bahan dan komponen berkualitas tinggi, yang dapat didaur ulang dan digunakan kembali Sistem Operasi OS Android: Bila Anda melihat simbol tempat sampah yang disilang pada produk, artinya produk tersebut dicakup dalam European Directive 2012/19/EU. Android Nougat 7 162

163 Penerimaan Konektivitas Input antena: Koaksial 75 ohm (IEC75) Band tuner: Hyperband, S-Channel, UHF, VHF DVB: DVB-T2; DVB-C (kabel) QAM Pemutaran video analog : SECAM, PAL Pemutaran video digital : MPEG2 SD/HD (ISO/IEC ), MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC ), HEVC Pemutaran audio digital (ISO/IEC ) Input antena satelit : 75 ohm tipe-f Rentang frekuensi input : 950 hingga 2150MHz Rentang level input : 25 hingga 65 dbm DVB-S/S2 QPSK, laju simbol 2 hingga 45M simbol, SCPC dan MCPC LNB: DiSEqC 1.0, 1 hingga 4 LNB didukung, Pemilihan polaritas 14/18V, Pemilihan pita 22kHz, Mode tune burst, arus LNB maks 300mA Bagian Samping TV Slot Antarmuka umum: CI+/CAM USB 1 - USB 2.0 USB 2 - USB 3.0 Headphone - Jack mini stereo 3,5mm HDMI 1 in - ARC - MHL - Ultra HD - HDR HDMI 2 in - ARC - Ultra HD - HDR Bagian Bawah TV Audio out - Optik Toslink LAN jaringan - RJ45 YPbPr, L/R HDMI 4 in - ARC HDMI 3 in - ARC Antena (75 ohm) Tuner satelit Hanya untuk DVB-T2, DVB-S Suara Resolusi Layar Daya output (RMS): 30W Dolby Audio DTS Premium Sound Ukuran layar diagonal 139 cm / 55 inci Resolusi layar 3840 x Multimedia 22.6 Resolusi Input Layar Sambungan USB USB 3.0 Ethernet LAN RJ-45 Wi-Fi a/b/g/n/ac (bawaan) BT2.1 dengan EDR & BT4.0 dengan BLE ( TV Anda tidak mendukung subwoofer Bluetooth dan speaker Bluetooth) Format video Resolusi Kecepatan refresh 480i - 60 Hz 480p - 60 Hz 576i - 50 Hz 576p - 50 Hz 720p - 50 Hz, 60 Hz 1080i - 50 Hz, 60 Hz 1080p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz Sistem file USB yang didukung FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS Format pemutaran Codec Video : AVI, MKV, H264/MPEG-4 AVC, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, WMV9/VC1, HEVC Codec Audio : AAC, MP3, WAV, WMA (v2 up to v9.2), WMA-PRO (v9 dan v10) Terjemahan : Format : SRT, SUB, TXT, SMI Pengkodean karakter : UTF-8, Eropa Tengah dan Eropa Timur (Windows-1250), Sirilik (Windows-1251), Yunani (Windows-1253), Turki (Windows-1254), Eropa Barat (Windows-1252) Codec Gambar: JPEG Batasan: Kecepatan bit total maksimum untuk file media adalah 30 Mbps. Kecepatan bit total maksimum untuk file media adalah 20 Mbps. Format komputer Resolusi (di antaranya) 640 x 480p - 60 Hz 800 x 600p - 60 Hz 1024 x 768p - 60 Hz 1280 x 768p - 60 Hz 1360 x 765p - 60 Hz 1360 x 768p - 60 Hz 1280 x 1024p - 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p - 60 Hz 3840 x 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz 163

164 MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) didukung hingga Profil L5.1. H.265 (HEVC) didukung hingga Profil Utama / Utama 10 hingga Level 5.1 VC-1 didukung hingga Profil L3. Perangkat lunak server media yang didukung (DMS) Anda hanya dapat menggunakan perangkat lunak server media tersertifikasi DLNA V1.5 (kelas DMS). Anda dapat menggunakan Aplikasi Remote Philips (ios dan Android) pada perangkat seluler. Kinerja mungkin berbeda, bergantung pada kemampuan perangkat seluler dan perangkat lunak yang digunakan. 164

165 bantuan dan Dukungan Penyelesaian Masalah Mengaktifkan dan Menonaktifkan Remote Control 23.1 TV tidak aktif Lepaskan kabel daya dari stopkontak. Tunggu sekitar satu menit lalu sambungkan kembali. Pastikan kabel daya tersambung dengan benar. Mendaftarkan TV Anda Daftarkan TV Anda dan nikmati berbagai keuntungan termasuk dukungan penuh (termasuk unduhan), akses istimewa ke informasi produk baru, tawaran dan diskon eksklusif, kesempatan memenangkan hadiah, dan bahkan berpartisipasi dalam survei khusus tentang edisi baru. Suara berderik saat pengaktifan atau penonaktifan Saat Anda menyalakan, mematikan atau membuat TV siaga, Anda mendengar bunyi berderik dari sasis TV. Bunyi berderik disebabkan oleh ekspansi dan penyusutan TV yang normal saat TV mendingin atau menghangat. Ini tidak mempengaruhi kinerjanya. Buka TV tidak merespons remote control 23.2 TV memerlukan waktu agak lama untuk memulai. Dalam waktu ini, TV tidak merespons remote control atau kontrol TV. Ini perilaku normal. Jika TV tetap tidak merespons remote control, periksalah apakah remote control berfungsi dengan menggunakan kamera ponsel. Atur ponsel dalam mode kamera dan arahkan remote control ke lensa kamera. Jika Anda menekan tombol pada remote control dan melihat lampu LED inframerah berkedip melalui kamera, maka remote control berfungsi. TV perlu diperiksa. Jika tidak terlihat adanya kedipan, remote control mungkin rusak atau baterainya lemah. Metode pemeriksaan remote control ini tidak dapat dilakukan pada remote control yang dipasangkan secara nirkabel dengan TV. Menggunakan Bantuan TV ini menyediakan bantuan di layar. Buka Bantuan Tekan tombol (biru) untuk membuka langsung Bantuan. Bantuan akan terbuka pada bab ini yang paling relevan dengan apa yang sedang Anda lakukan atau apa yang dipilih di TV. Untuk mencari topik berdasarkan abjad, tekan tombol berwarna Kata Kunci. Untuk membaca Bantuan dalam bentuk buku, pilih Buku. Anda juga bisa membuka Bantuan di menu Awal atau menu TV. TV kembali ke siaga setelah menampilkan layar Sebelum menjalankan petunjuk Bantuan, tutup Bantuan. Untuk menutup Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Tutup. pengaktifan Philips Jika TV dalam keadaan siaga, layar pengaktifan Philips ditampilkan, lalu TV kembali ke mode siaga. Ini perilaku normal. Jika TV dilepas sambungannya dan disambungkan lagi ke catu daya, layar pengaktifan ditampilkan pada saat diaktifkan lagi. Untuk mengaktifkan TV dari siaga, tekan pada remote control atau TV. Untuk beberapa aktivitas, seperti Teks (Teleteks), tombol warna memiliki fungsi khusus dan tidak dapat membuka Bantuan. Bantuan TV di tablet, smartphone atau komputer Lampu siaga terus berkedip Untuk melakukan urutan petunjuk yang lebih rumit dengan lebih mudah, Anda dapat mengunduh Bantuan TV dalam format PDF untuk dibaca pada smartphone, tablet atau komputer Anda. Selain itu, Anda juga dapat mencetak halaman Bantuan yang sesuai dari komputer Anda. Untuk mengunduh Bantuan (buku petunjuk), buka Lepaskan kabel daya dari stopkontak. Tunggu 5 menit sebelum Anda menyambungkan kabel daya kembali. Jika berkedip lagi, hubungi Dukungan Pelanggan TV Philips. 165

166 Pastikan PC Anda menggunakan resolusi dan kecepatan refresh yang didukung. Saluran Saluran digital tidak ditemukan selama penginstalan Suara Lihat spesifikasi teknis untuk memastikan bahwa TV mendukung DVB-T atau DVB-C di negara Anda. Pastikan semua kabel tersambung dengan benar dan jaringan yang benar dipilih. Tidak ada suara atau kualitas suara buruk Jika sinyal audio tidak terdeteksi, TV akan otomatis menonaktifkan output audio ini bukan kerusakan. Saluran yang diinstal sebelumnya tidak ada di dalam Pastikan pengaturan suara diatur dengan benar. Pastikan semua kabel tersambung dengan benar. Pastikan volume tidak didiamkan atau diatur ke nol. Pastikan output audio TV tersambung ke input audio di Sistem Home Theatre. Suara seharusnya terdengar dari speaker HTS. Beberapa perangkat mungkin memerlukan pengaktifan output audio HDMI secara manual. Jika audio HDMI telah diaktifkan, tetapi Anda masih belum bisa mendengar audionya, coba ubah format audio digital perangkat menjadi PCM (Pulse Code Modulation). Lihat dokumentasi yang menyertai perangkat Anda untuk petunjuknya. daftar saluran Pastikan daftar saluran yang benar dipilih. Gambar Tidak ada gambar/gambar terdistorsi Pastikan antena tersambung dengan benar ke TV. Pastikan perangkat lunak yang benar dipilih sebagai sumber tampilan. Pastikan perangkat atau sumber eksternal tersambung dengan benar. Ada suara tapi tidak ada gambar Pastikan pengaturan gambar diatur dengan benar. HDMI dan USB Penerimaan antena buruk Pastikan antena tersambung dengan benar ke TV. Pengeras suara, perangkat audio yang tidak ditanahkan, lampu neon, gedung tinggi dan bendabenda besar lainnya dapat memengaruhi kualitas penerimaan. Jika memungkinkan, cobalah untuk meningkatkan kualitas penerimaan dengan mengubah arah antena atau menjauhkan perangkat dari TV. Jika penerimaan di satu saluran saja yang buruk, sempurnakan saluran ini dengan Penginstalan Manual. HDMI Perhatikan bahwa dukungan HDCP (Perlindungan Konten Digital Bandwidth Tinggi) dapat menambah waktu yang diperlukan TV untuk menampilkan konten dari perangkat HDMI. Jika TV tidak mengenali perangkat HDMI dan tidak ada gambar yang ditampilkan, beralihlah dari satu perangkat ke perangkat lain dan kembali lagi. Jika gambar dan suara perangkat yang tersambung ke HDMI 3 atau HDMI 4 terdistorsi, sambungkan perangkat ke HDMI 1 atau HDMI 2 di TV ini. Jika gambar dan suara perangkat yang tersambung dengan HDMI terganggu, periksa apakah pengaturan HDMI Ultra HD lainnya bisa mengatasi masalah ini. Di Bantuan, tekan tombol berwarna Kata kunci dan cari HDMI Ultra HD untuk informasi selengkapnya. Jika ada gangguan suara berselang, pastikan pengaturan output dari perangkat HDMI benar. Jika Anda menggunakan adaptor HDMI-ke-DVI atau kabel HDMI-ke-DVI, pastikan kabel audio tambahan tersambung ke AUDIO IN (jack mini saja), jika tersedia. Gambar dari perangkat buruk Pastikan perangkat tersambung dengan benar. Pastikan pengaturan gambar diatur dengan benar. Pengaturan gambar berubah setelah beberapa saat Pastikan Lokasi diatur ke Awal. Anda dapat mengganti dan menyimpan pengaturan dalam mode ini. Banner komersial muncul Pastikan Lokasi diatur ke Awal. EasyLink HDMI tidak berfungsi Pastikan bahwa perangkat HDMI Anda kompatibel dengan HDMI-CEC. Fitur EasyLink hanya berfungsi dengan perangkat yang kompatibel dengan HDMICEC. Gambar tidak pas dengan layar Ubah menjadi format gambar yang berbeda. Posisi gambar salah Ikon tidak ada volume ditampilkan Jika perangkat audio HDMI-CEC tersambung dan Anda menggunakan Remote Control TV untuk menyesuaikan tingkat volume perangkat, hal ini Sinyal gambar dari beberapa perangkat mungkin tidak pas di layar. Periksa output sinyal perangkat yang tersambung. Gambar komputer tidak stabil 166

167 normal. Foto, video dan musik dari perangkat USB tidak TV yang tidak dapat diperbaiki, atau membatalkan garansi. ditampilkan Pastikan perangkat penyimpanan USB diatur agar sesuai dengan Kelas Penyimpanan Massal, seperti yang dijelaskan dalam dokumentasi perangkat penyimpanan. Pastikan perangkat penyimpanan USB kompatibel dengan TV. Pastikan format file audio dan gambar didukung oleh TV. Pemutaran file USB tersendat-sendat Kinerja transfer perangkat penyimpanan USB mungkin membatasi kecepatan transfer data ke TV yang menyebabkan pemutaran buruk Bantuan online Untuk menyelesaikan masalah terkait TV Philips, Anda dapat bertanya kepada dukungan online kami. Anda dapat memilih bahasa dan mengetikkan nomor model produk Anda. Buka Pada situs dukungan Anda dapat menemukan nomor telepon dukungan pelanggan di negara Anda serta jawaban atas pertanyaan yang sering diajukan (FAQ). Di beberapa negara, Anda dapat bercakap-cakap melalui Internet dengan salah satu kolaborator kami dan mengajukan pertanyaan langsung atau mengirim pertanyaan via . Anda dapat mengunduh perangkat lunak TV atau buku petunjuk untuk dibaca di komputer Dukungan dan Perbaikan Untuk masalah dukungan dan perbaikan, hubungi hotline Dukungan Pelanggan di negara Anda. Teknisi servis kami akan melakukan perbaikan, jika perlu. Cari nomor telepon di dokumen cetak yang disertakan dengan TV Anda. Atau kunjungi situs web kami dan pilih negara Anda jika diperlukan. Nomor model dan nomor seri TV Anda mungkin diminta untuk memberi nomor model produk TV dan nomor seri TV. Temukan nomor ini di label kemasan atau pada label jenis di bagian belakang atau bawah TV. Peringatan Jangan sekali-kali memperbaiki TV sendiri. Tindakan tersebut bisa menyebabkan cedera parah, kerusakan 167

168 menopang berat TV dan dudukan. Saat terpasang, pastikan braket pemasangan di dinding tersebut dapat dengan aman menopang berat TV. TP Vision tidak bertanggung jawab atas kesalahan pemasangan di dinding yang menyebabkan kecelakaan, cedera, atau kerusakan. Beberapa bagian dari produk ini terbuat dari kaca. Tangani dengan hati-hati untuk menghindari cedera atau kerusakan. 24 Keselamatan dan Perawatan 24.1 Keselamatan Risiko kerusakan pada TV! Sebelum menyambungkan TV ke stopkontak, pastikan voltase daya cocok dengan nilai voltase yang tertera di bagian belakang TV. Jangan sekali-kali menyambungkan TV ke stopkontak jika voltasenya berbeda. Penting Baca dan pahami semua petunjuk keselamatan sebelum menggunakan TV. Jika kerusakan tersebut diakibatkan ketidakpatuhan terhadap petunjuk, garansi akan hangus. Risiko Cedera pada Anak-Anak Risiko Tersengat Aliran Listrik atau Kebakaran Ikuti tindakan pencegahan ini agar TV tidak terguling dan menyebabkan cedera pada anak-anak: Jangan letakkan TV pada permukaan yang tertutup kain atau bahan yang dapat ditarik. Pastikan tidak ada bagian TV yang menggantung di tepi permukaan pemasangan. Jangan meletakkan TV pada perabot yang tinggi, seperti rak buku, tanpa menahan perabot dan TV ke dinding atau penopang yang sesuai. Beri tahu anak-anak tentang bahaya memanjat perabot untuk menjangkau TV. Hindarkan TV dari terkena hujan atau air. Jangan sekali-kali meletakkan wadah berisi zat cair, seperti vas, di dekat TV. Jika cairan tumpah di atas atau masuk ke dalam TV, segera lepaskan TV dari stopkontak. Hubungi Layanan Pelanggan TV Philips agar TV diperiksa sebelum digunakan. Jangan paparkan TV, remote control atau baterai pada panas berlebih. Jangan menempatkan barangbarang tersebut dekat lilin yang menyala, api terbuka atau sumber panas lain, termasuk sinar matahari langsung. Jangan masukkan benda ke slot ventilasi atau bagian-bagian terbuka lainnya pada TV. Jangan meletakkan benda-benda berat di atas kabel daya. Hindari mendorong keras steker daya secara paksa. Steker daya yang longgar bisa menimbulkan percikan api atau kebakaran. Pastikan tidak ada tekanan pada kabel daya saat Anda memutar layar TV. Untuk memutus sambungan TV dari daya listrik utama, steker daya TV harus dilepaskan. Saat memutus sambungan daya, selalu tarik stekernya, jangan kabelnya. Pastikan Anda selalu memiliki akses sepenuhnya terhadap steker, kabel, dan stopkontak. Risiko menelan baterai! Remote control mungkin menggunakan baterai jeniskoin yang bisa dengan mudah tertelan oleh anak kecil. Selalu jauhkan baterai dari jangkauan anakanak. Risiko Panas Berlebih Jangan sekali-kali memasang TV di ruang yang sempit. Selalu berikan jarak sekitar 10 cm atau 4 inci di sekitar TV untuk ventilasi. Pastikan tirai atau objek lain tidak menutup slot ventilasi pada TV. Badai Petir Lepas TV dari stopkontak dan antena sebelum terjadi badai petir. Selama badai petir, jangan menyentuh bagian apa pun dari TV, kabel daya atau kabel antena. Risiko Cedera atau Kerusakan pada TV Perlu dua orang untuk mengangkat dan membawa TV yang beratnya lebih dari 25 kg atau 55 lbs. Jika Anda memasang TV pada dudukan, gunakan dudukan yang disertakan saja. Kencangkan dudukan TV dengan kuat. Letakkan TV di permukaan datar dan rata yang dapat 168

169 Risiko Kerusakan Pendengaran Jangan menggunakan earphone atau headphone pada volume tinggi atau dalam jangka waktu lama. Suhu Rendah Jika TV diangkut dalam suhu di bawah 5 C atau 41 F, bongkar TV dan tunggu hingga suhu TV mencapai suhu kamar sebelum menyambungkan TV ke stopkontak. Kelembapan Bergantung pada suhu dan kelembapan, Anda mungkin mendapati sedikit kondensasi di bagian dalam kaca depan TV Anda (di beberapa model), namun kasus ini sangat jarang terjadi. Untuk mencegahnya, hindarkan TV dari sinar matahari langsung, panas, atau kelembapan ekstrem. Jika terjadi, kondensasi tersebut akan langsung lenyap saat TV diputar selama beberapa jam. Uap kondensasi tidak akan membahayakan TV atau menyebabkan malfungsi Perawatan Layar Jangan menyentuh, menekan, menggosok atau membentur layar dengan benda apa pun. Cabut kabel daya TV sebelum membersihkan. Bersihkan TV dan bingkai dengan kain lembap yang lembut dan seka perlahan. Jangan menyentuh LED Ambilight yang terdapat di bagian belakang TV. Jangan gunakan zat-zat seperti alkohol, zat kimiawi atau pembersih rumah tangga pada TV. Agar bentuknya tidak berubah dan warnanya tidak memudar, seka tetesan air sesegera mungkin. Hindari gambar diam semaksimal mungkin. Gambar diam adalah gambar yang tetap ditampilkan di layar dalam jangka waktu lama. Gambar diam termasuk menu di layar, bilah hitam, tampilan waktu, dll. Jika Anda harus menggunakan gambar diam, kurangi kontras dan kecerahan layar untuk mencegah kerusakan pada layar. 169

170 direkomendasikan atau diotorisasikan di buku petunjuk ini akan membatalkan garansi. 25 Ketentuan Penggunaan Karakteristik piksel Produk TV ini memiliki piksel berwarna dalam jumlah banyak. Meskipun jumlah piksel efektifnya 99,999% atau lebih, titik hitam atau titik terang cahaya (merah, hijau, atau biru) mungkin muncul secara konstan pada layar. Itu merupakan karakteristik struktur dari layar (dalam Standar industri umum) dan bukan merupakan kerusakan Ketentuan Penggunaan - TV 2017 TP Vision Europe B.V. Semua hak dilindungi undang-undang. Kepatuhan CE Dengan ini, TP Vision Europe B.V. menyatakan bahwa televisi ini mematuhi ketentuan penting dan peraturan relevan lainnya yang diberlakukan Directive berikut 1999/5/EC RTTE), 2004/108/EC (EMC), 2006/95/ EC (Tegangan Rendah), 2009/125/EC (Pelabelan Energi), dan 2011/65/EC (RoHS). Mulai Juni 2016 akan diberlakukan Directive berikut: 2014/53/EU (RED), 2009/125/EC (Desain Ramah Lingkungan), 2010/30/EU (Pelabelan Energi), dan 2011/65/EC (RoHS). Produk ini dipasarkan oleh TP Vision Europe B.V. atau salah satu afiliasinya, yang selanjutnya dalam dokumen ini disebut TP Vision, yang merupakan produsen produk ini. TP Vision adalah pemberi garansi terkait TV ini yang di dalamnya disertai buklet ini. Philips dan Philips Shield Emblem adalah merek dagang terdaftar dari Koninklijke Philips N.V. Spesifikasi bisa berubah tanpa pemberitahuan. Merek dagang adalah hak milik Koninklijke Philips N.V atau pemiliknya masing-masing. TP Vision berhak mengubah produk kapan pun tanpa berkewajiban untuk menyesuaikan suplai sebelumnya. Kepatuhan terhadap EMF TP Vision memproduksi dan menjual banyak produk yang ditargetkan bagi konsumen, seperti perkakas elektronik lainnya, yang secara umum memiliki kemampuan untuk memancarkan dan menerima sinyal elektromagnetik. Salah satu prinsip bisnis TP Vision yang terkemuka adalah melakukan semua upaya kesehatan dan keselamatan yang diperlukan untuk produk kami, guna mematuhi semua ketentuan hukum yang berlaku dan tetap mengikuti standar Medan Elektro Magnetik (EMF) yang berlaku pada saat memproduksi produk tersebut. Materi tertulis yang dikemas bersama TV dan buku petunjuk yang tersimpan di dalam memori TV atau diunduh dari situs web Philips diyakini cukup untuk penggunaan sistem sesuai peruntukannya. Materi di panduan ini diyakini cukup untuk membantu penggunaan sistem sesuai peruntukannya. Jika produk, atau masing-masing modul atau prosedurnya digunakan untuk tujuan selain yang ditetapkan di sini, pastikan kevalidan dan kesesuaiannya. TP Vision menjamin bahwa materinya tidak melanggar satu pun paten Amerika Serikat. Tidak ada jaminan lain yang tersurat maupun tersirat. TP Vision tidak dapat dimintai pertanggungjawabannya atas kesalahan isi di dalam dokumen ini atau masalah akibat konten dalam dokumen ini. Kesalahan yang dilaporkan kepada Philips akan disesuaikan dan dipublikasikan di situs web dukungan Philips sesegera mungkin. TP Vision berkomitmen untuk mengembangkan, memproduksi, dan memasarkan produk yang tidak menyebabkan efek buruk terhadap kesehatan. TP Vision menyatakan bahwa selama produk ditangani dengan benar sesuai peruntukannya, produk aman untuk digunakan sesuai bukti ilmiah yang tersedia saat ini. TP Vision berperan aktif dalam pengembangan standar EMF dan keselamatan internasional, sehingga TP Vision dapat mengantisipasi perkembangan lebih lanjut dalam standardisasi ini untuk menyertakannya dalam produknya sedari awal. Ketentuan jaminan - Risiko cedera, kerusakan pada TV, atau pembatalan garansi! Jangan sekali-sekali memperbaiki sendiri TV Anda. Gunakan TV dan aksesori hanya sesuai peruntukannya oleh produsen. Tanda perhatian yang tertera pada bagian belakang TV menunjukkan risiko sengatan listrik. Jangan sekali-kali melepaskan penutup TV. Selalu hubungi Layanan Pelanggan TV Philips untuk melakukan servis atau perbaikan. Cari nomor telepon di dokumen cetak yang disertakan dengan TV Anda. Atau kunjungi situs web kami dan pilih negara Anda jika diperlukan. Semua operasi yang secara tegas dilarang di buku petunjuk ini, atau semua penyetelan dan prosedur perakitan yang tidak 25.2 Ketentuan Penggunaan Smart TV Anda dapat melihat ketentuan penggunaan, kebijakan privasi, dan juga menetapkan pengaturan privasi untuk Smart TV Anda. Untuk membuka halaman ketentuan penggunaan Smart TV 170

171 1 - Tekan HOME untuk membuka menu Awal. 2 - Pilih App untuk membuka Aplikasi. 171

172 Hak Cipta Dolby Audio 26.1 Diproduksi berdasarkan lisensi dari Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, dan simbol D ganda merupakan merek dagang dari Dolby MHL Laboratories. MHL MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link dan Logo MHL adalah merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari MHL, LLC DTS Premium Sound DTS Premium Sound Untuk paten DTS, lihat Diproduksi berdasarkan lisensi dari DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, Simbolnya, & DTS serta Simbolnya secara bersamaan merupakan merek dagang terdaftar, dan DTS Premium Sound merupakan merek dagang dari DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. Hak Cipta Dilindungi Undang-undang Ultra HD Ultra HD Logo DIGITALEUROPE UHD Display adalah merek dagang dari DIGITALEUROPE HDMI Wi-Fi Alliance HDMI Wi-Fi Istilah HDMI dan Antarmuka Multimedia DefinisiTinggi HDMI, serta Logo HDMI merupakan merek dagang atau merek dagang terdaftar dari HDMI Licensing LLC di Amerika Serikat dan negara-negara lainnya. Wi-Fi, logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, logo Wi-Fi adalah merek dagang terdaftar Wi-Fi Alliance. 172